2004 MAXIMA OWNER'S MANUAL
Upcoming SlideShare
Loading in...5
×

Like this? Share it with your network

Share

2004 MAXIMA OWNER'S MANUAL

  • 493 views
Uploaded on

Classic Cars Nissan offers you excellent sales and service on new or used Nissan vehicles. Stop in and test drive a Nissan 2004 MAXIMA or any car or truck today! We're located Hainesport New Jersey......

Classic Cars Nissan offers you excellent sales and service on new or used Nissan vehicles. Stop in and test drive a Nissan 2004 MAXIMA or any car or truck today! We're located Hainesport New Jersey between Cherry Hill and Mount Holly. Only 20 minutes from Philadelphia. Classic Cars Nissan 1513 Route 38 Hainesport, NJ 08036 866-CLASSIC or 866-252-7742

More in: Automotive , Business
  • Full Name Full Name Comment goes here.
    Are you sure you want to
    Your message goes here
    Be the first to comment
No Downloads

Views

Total Views
493
On Slideshare
493
From Embeds
0
Number of Embeds
0

Actions

Shares
Downloads
2
Comments
0
Likes
1

Embeds 0

No embeds

Report content

Flagged as inappropriate Flag as inappropriate
Flag as inappropriate

Select your reason for flagging this presentation as inappropriate.

Cancel
    No notes for slide

Transcript

  • 1. The inside pages of this manual containFOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY a minimum of 50% recycled fibers, including 10% post-consumer fibers.Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN Before driving your vehicle please read this Own- MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLEowners. This vehicle is delivered to you with er’s Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarityconfidence. It was produced using the latest with controls and maintenance requirements, as- This vehicle should not be modified.techniques and strict quality control. sisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle. Modification could affect its performance, safety or durability, andThis manual was prepared to help you under- WARNING may even violate governmentalstand the operation and maintenance of yourvehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome- regulations. In addition, damage or per- IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through this MINDERS FOR SAFETY! formance problems resulting frommanual before operating your vehicle. modifications may not be covered un- Follow these important driving rules to der NISSAN warranties.A separate Warranty Information Booklet help ensure a safe and complete trip forexplains details about the warranties cov- you and your passengers!ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Service ● NEVER drive under the influence of al-and Maintenance Guide” explains details cohol or drugs.about maintaining and servicing your ve-hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer ● ALWAYS observe posted speed limitsCare/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will and never drive too fast for conditions.explain how to resolve any concerns you ● ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-may have with your vehicle, as well as priate child restraint systems. Preteenclarify your rights under your state’s lemon children should be seated in the rearlaw. seat.Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle ● ALWAYS provide information about thebest. When you require any service or have any proper use of vehicle safety features toquestions, they will be glad to assist you with the all occupants of the vehicle.extensive resources available to them. ● ALWAYS review this owner’s manual for important safety information. ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 2. The inside pages of this manual containWHEN READING THE MANUAL a minimum of 50% recycled fibers, including 10% post-consumer fibers.This manual includes information for all options CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65available on this model. Therefore, you may find WARNINGsome information that does not apply to yourvehicle. WARNINGAll information, specifications and illustrations in Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,this manual are those in effect at the time of and certain vehicle components containprinting. NISSAN reserves the right to change or emit chemicals known to the State ofspecifications or design without notice and with- California to cause cancer and birth de-out obligation. fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT tion, certain fluids contained in vehiclesTHIS MANUAL and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to theYou will see various symbols in this manual. They State of California to cause cancer andare used in the following ways: APD1005 birth defects or other reproductive harm. If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this” © 2003 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC. WARNING or “Do not let this happen.” GARDENA, CALIFORNIAThis is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause death or serious All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’spersonal injury. To avoid or reduce the Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra- system, or transmitted in any form, or by anyrisk, the procedures must be followed tion, it means the arrow points to the front of theprecisely. means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, vehicle. recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan North America, Inc., Gar- CAUTION dena, California.This is used to indicate the presence of a Arrows in an illustration that are similar to thesehazard that could cause minor or moder- indicate movement or action.ate personal injury or damage to your ve-hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-cedures must be followed carefully. Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the illustration. ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 3. WELCOME TO THE WORLD OF NISSAN NISSAN pioneered the use of electronics and com- puters in automobiles, and has led the industry in improving both performance and fuel efficiency through new engine designs and the use of syn- thetic materials to reduce vehicle weight. The com- pany has also developed ways to build quality into its vehicles at each stage of the production process, both through extensive use of automation and — most importantly — through an awareness that people are the central element in quality control. From the time the parts arrived from our suppliers until you took delivery of your new NISSAN, dozens of checks were made to ensure that only the best job was being done in producing and delivering your vehicle. NISSAN also takes great care to ensure that when you take your NISSAN to your dealer for WFW0002 maintenance, the service technician will perform his work according to the quality standards that haveYour new NISSAN is the result of our dedication to styling design at Nissan Design America, Inc. in San been established by NISSAN.produce the finest in safe, reliable and economical Diego, California, and engineering at Nissan Tech-transportation. Your vehicle is the product of a suc- nical Center North America in Farmington Hills, Safety has also been built into your NISSAN. As youcessful worldwide company that manufactures cars Michigan. Additionally, NISSAN employs more than know, seat belts are an integral part of the safetyand trucks in over 17 countries and distributes them 21,000 people throughout the United States, systems that will help protect you and your passen-in 170 nations. Canada, and Mexico. An additional 60,000 people gers in the event of a sudden stop or an accident. work for the 1,250 NISSAN and INFINITI dealers We urge you to use the seat belts every time youNISSAN vehicles are designed and manufactured drive the vehicle.by Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. which was founded in across North America.Tokyo, Japan in 1933, and NISSAN affiliates world- The NISSAN story of growth and achievement re-wide, collectively growing to become the fifth largest NISSAN is also a substantial contributor to the flects our major goal: to provide you, our customer,automaker in the world. In addition to cars and Canadian economy. Nissan Canada Inc., its suppli- with a vehicle that is built with quality and craftsman-trucks, NISSAN also makes forklift trucks, marine ers and over 150 dealers employ approximately ship — a product that we can be proud to build andengines, boats and other diversified products. 4,500 people. These include company employees you can be proud to own. and the staffs of NISSAN dealers all across Canada.NISSAN has made a substantial and growing in- In addition, many Canadians work for companiesvestment in North America. NISSAN’s commitment that supply NISSAN and NISSAN dealers with ma-is over $6 billion dollars in capital investments in terials and services ranging from the operation offacilities across the continent. Some of the facilities port facilities and transportation services, to theinclude the Nissan Manufacturing facilities in Can- supply of lubricants, parts and accessories.ton, Mississippi and in Smyrna, Tennessee, vehicle ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 4. NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAMNISSAN CARES . . .Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer areour primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.However, if there is something that your NISSAN The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the You can write to NISSAN with the information at:dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to following information:provide NISSAN directly with comments or ques- For U.S. mainland and Alaska customerstions, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs – Your name, address, and telephone number Nissan North America, Inc.Department using our toll-free number: Consumer Affairs Department – Vehicle identification number (attached to the P.O. Box 191For U.S. mainland and Alaska customers top of the instrument panel on the driver’s Gardena, California 90248-0191 1-800-NISSAN-1 side) (1-800-647-7261) For Hawaii customers – Date of purchase Nissan Motor Corporation in HawaiiFor Hawaii customers 2880 Kilihau St. – Current odometer reading 1-808-836-0888 (Oahu Number) Honolulu, Hawaii 96819 – Your NISSAN dealer’s nameFor Canadian customers For Canadian customers 1-800-387-0122 – Your comments or questions Nissan Canada Inc. OR 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5 We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle. ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 5. Table of Illustrated table of contents 0Contents Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1 Instruments and controls 2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4 Starting and driving 5 In case of emergency 6 Appearance and care 7 Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8 Technical and consumer information 9 Index 10
  • 6. ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max)Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna)10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 7. 0 Illustrated table of contentsAirbags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2 Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3 Engine compartment locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4 Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 8. AIRBAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILDRESTRAINTS 1. Supplemental front impact air bags (P. 1-9) 2. Supplemental curtain side-impact air bag (P. 1-9) 3. Supplemental side impact air bag (P. 1-9) 4. Seat belt pretensioners (P. 1-20) 5. Front seat belts (P. 1-23) 6. Rear seat belts (P. 1-23) 7. Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-39) 8. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) (P. 1-38) 9. Seats (P. 1-2) 10. Front head restraint (P. 1-8, P. 1-9) 11. Rear head restraint (P. 1-8) See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details. LII00010-2 Illustrated table of contents ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 9. EXTERIOR FRONT 1. Engine hood (P. 3-10) 2. Headlight and turn signal switch (P. 2-19) 3. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-30) 4. Windshield wiper and washer switch (P. 2-17) 5. Windshield (P. 8-21) 6. Sunroof (P. 2-36) 7. Power windows (P. 2-34) 8. Door locks, keyfob, keys (P. 3-3, 3-5, 3-2) 9. Mirrors (P. 3-17) 10. Tire pressure (P. 9-11) 11. Flat tire (P. 6-2) 12. Tire chains (P. 8-39) 13. Cornering light (P. 2-19) 14. Fog light switch (P. 2-19) 15. Tie down/towing hooks (P. 6-11) See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details. LII0002 Illustrated table of contents 0-3 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 10. EXTERIOR REAR 1. Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-18) 2. Rear sun shade (P. 2-38) 3. Interior trunk lid release (P. 3-12) 4. Trunk lid (P. 3-10) 5. Vehicle loading (P. 9-12) 6. Tie-down/towing hook (P. 6-12) 7. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-30) 8. Fuel filler cap, fuel recommendation (P. 3-13, P. 9-3) 9. Fuel filler lid (P. 3-13) 10. Child safety locks (P. 3-5) See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details. LII00030-4 Illustrated table of contents ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 11. PASSENGER COMPARTMENT 1. Automatic anti-glare inside mirror (P. 3-17) 2. Interior lights, illuminated entry (P. 2-39, P. 2-19) 3. Sun visors (P. 3-16) 4. Glove box (P. 2-31) 5. Sunroof (P. 2-36) 6. Front seat (P. 1-2) 7. Rear console (P. 2-32) 8. Rear seat (P. 1-6) 9. Rear cup holders (P. 2-29) 10. Front console (P. 2-31) 11. Front cup holders (P. 2-29) 12. Park brake, parking on hills (P. 5-12, P. 5-16) 13. HomeLinkா (P. 2-42) See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details. WII0011 Illustrated table of contents 0-5 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 12. INSTRUMENT PANEL 1. Headlight and turn signal switch (P. 2-19) 2. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3) 3. Windshield wiper/washer switch (P. 2-17) 4. Driver side, center and passenger side ventilators (P. 4-14) 5. Security indicator light (P. 2-14) 6. Display screen/Navigation system* (P. 4-2, P. 4-7) 7. Audio system controls (P. 4-19) 8. Climate controls (P. 4-16) 9. Front passenger supplemental air bag (P. 1-9) 10. Glove box (P. 2-31) 11. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-23) 12. Cruise control main/set switches (P. 2-23) 13. Driver supplemental air bag/horn (P. 1-9, P. 2-24) 14. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls (P. 3-14) 15. Steering wheel switch for audio control (P. 4-31) 16. Heated steering wheel switch (P. 2-25) WII00050-6 Illustrated table of contents ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 13. 17. Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch (if so equipped) or Traction con- trol system (TCS) off switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-26, P. 2-26)18. Outside mirror controls (P. 3-17)19. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-22)20. Heated seat switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-24)21. Rear sunshade switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-38)*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual (if so equipped).See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details. Illustrated table of contents 0-7 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 14. ENGINE COMPARTMENT LOCATIONS 1. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-13) 2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-8) 3. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-13) 4. Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T model) (P. 8-14) 5. Air cleaner (P. 8-18) 6. Battery (P. 8-15) 7. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-23) 8. Transmission dipstick (A/T models) (P. 8-11) 9. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-8) 10. Radiator cap (P. 8-7) 11. Fuse block (P. 8-23) 12. Windshield washer fluid reservoir (P. 8-14) 13. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-7) See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details. WII00060-8 Illustrated table of contents ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—skoniecz ੭
  • 15. WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS Warning Name Page Warning Name Page Indicator Name Page light light light Engine oil pres- 2-10 Automatic 2-12 Anti-lock brake 2-9 sure light transmission or warning light position indica- Low fuel warn- 2-11 tor light (A/T ing light models) Automatic 2-10 Low windshield 2-11 transmission CRUISE main 2-12 washer fluid check warning switch indicator warning light light (if so light equipped) Seat belt warn- 2-11 Cruise SET 2-12 ing light and Brake warning 2-10 switch indicator chime or light light Supplemental 2-11 High beam in- 2-12 air bag warning dicator light Charge warning 2-10 light (blue) light Trunk lid open 2-11 Malfunction 2-12 Door open 2-10 warning light indicator lamp warning light (MIL) Illustrated table of contents 0-9 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—skoniecz ੭
  • 16. Indicator Name Page light Slip indicator 2-13 light (if so equipped) Traction control 2-13 system off indi- cator light (if so equipped) Turn 2-13 signal/hazard indicator lights Vehicle dynam- 2-13 ics control off indicator light (if so equipped)0-10 Illustrated table of contents ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 17. 1 Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental air bagsSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Front manual seat adjustment — passenger Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 Front power seat adjustment (for driver’s Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 seat and if so equipped for passenger’s Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . 1-27 seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30 Folding rear seat (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30 Head restraint adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31 Active head restraint (front seats). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Installation on rear seat center (5-passenger Precautions on supplemental restraint models only) or outboard positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 CHildren) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38 Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Installation on front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 18. SEATS FRONT MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTMENT — PASSENGER SIDE WARNING ● Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. The seat may move suddenly and could cause loss of con- trol of the vehicle. ● After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked. ARS1152 WARNING ● For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when be upright. Always sit well back in the the seatback is reclined. This can be seat and adjust the seat properly. See dangerous. The shoulder belt will not “Precautions on Seat Belt Usage” later be against your body. In an accident, in this section. you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 19. WARNING After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked. LRS0244 LRS0245Forward and backward RecliningPull the lever up and hold it while you slide the To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and leanseat forward or backward to the desired position. back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the leverRelease the lever to lock the seat in position. up and lean your body forward. Release the lever to lock the seatback in position. The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes to help obtain proper seat belt fit (see “Precautions on seat belt usage” later in this section). Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-3 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 20. ● Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery. See “Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped)” in “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” for auto- matic drive positioner operation. Forward and backward Moving the switch forward or backward will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Reclining WRS0163 Move the recline switch backward until the de- sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatbackFRONT POWER SEAT ● Do not leave children unattended inside forward again, move the switch forward andADJUSTMENT (for driver’s seat and if the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac- move your body forward. The seatback will moveso equipped for passenger’s seat) tivate switches or controls. Unattended forward. children could become involved in seri- ous accidents. The reclining feature allows adjustment of the WARNING seatback for occupants of different sizes to help● Do not adjust the driver’s seat while Operating tips obtain proper seat belt fit (see “Precautions on driving so full attention may be given to seat belt usage” later in this section). Also, the ● The power seat motor has an auto-reset seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to vehicle operation. The seat may move overload protection circuit. If the motor suddenly and could cause loss of con- rest when the vehicle is stopped. stops during operation, wait 30 seconds, trol of the vehicle. then reactivate the switch.1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—skoniecz ੭
  • 21. WRS0164 LRS0239 LRS0238Seat lifter (driver’s seat) Manual PowerPush the front or rear end of the switch up or Lumbar support (driver’s seat)down to adjust the angle and height of the seat The lumbar support feature provides lower backcushion. support to the driver. Move the lever up or down (manual) or move the switch forward or backward (power) to adjust the seat lumbar area. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-5 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 22. Interior trunk access ● When returning the seatbacks to the For models without rear center console, the trunk upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched posi- can be accessed from the passenger side of the tion. If they are not completely secured, rear seat for loading and unloading, as shown. passengers may be injured in an acci- ᭺ 1 Push down on the button on the rear parcel dent or sudden stop. shelf. ● Closely supervise children when they ᭺ 2 Fold down the passenger side seatback. are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the WARNING trunk where they could be seriously in- jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear ● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo seatback and trunk lid securely latched area or on the rear seat when it is in the when not in use, and prevent children’s fold-down position. Use of these areas access to car keys. by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury in an acci- dent or sudden stop. ● The 4-passenger model has seating and seat belts for 4 occupants, 2 in the front seats and 2 in the rear seats. Never use the rear console as a seating position or for a child restraint. LRS0246 ● Properly secure all cargo with ropes orFOLDING REAR SEAT (if so straps to help prevent it from sliding orequipped) shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col- lision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 23. LRS0247 LIC0431 LIC0401To fold down the driver side of the rear seat, reach For models with rear center console, the trunk Center armrestthrough the opening and pull on the strap ᭺ 1 can be accessed through the access panel be-located behind the seat. tween the rear seats. Pull the armrest forward until it is horizontal.The rear seats can be locked using the master The panel can be locked using the master key tokey to prevent unauthorized access. The valet key prevent unauthorized access. The valet key can-cannot be used to lock or unlock the release not be used to lock or unlock the access panel.button. For more information on keys, refer to ”Keys” in the Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-7 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 24. LRS0241 LRS0240 WRS0134 Type A — Front Type B — Rear Adjust the head restraint so the center is levelHEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT WARNING with the center of your ears.To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower, Head restraints should be adjusted prop-push and hold the lock knob and push the head erly as they may provide significant pro-restraint down. tection against injury in an accident. Do not remove them. Check the adjustmentTo adjust the head restraint forward or backward after someone else uses the seat.(Type A only), push it in the direction required.1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 25. SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM ● Do not attach anything to the head re- PRECAUTIONS ON straint stalks. Doing so could impair SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT active head restraint function. SYSTEM The head restraint moves forward utilizing the This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec- force that the seatback receives from the occu- tion contains important information concerning pant in a rear-end collision. The movement of the the driver and passenger supplemental front air head restraint helps support the occupant’s head bags, supplemental side air bags, curtain side- by reducing its backward movement and helping impact air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts. absorb some of the forces that may lead to whip- lash type injuries. Supplemental front impact air bag system: This system can help cushion the impact force to Active head restraints are effective for collisions the head and chest of the driver and front pas- at low to medium speeds in which it is said that senger in certain frontal collisions. whiplash injury occurs most. SPA1025 Supplemental side-impact air bag system: Active head restraints operate only in certain This system can help cushion the impact force toACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINT (front rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head the chest area of the driver and front passenger inseats) restraints return to their original positions. certain side impact collisions. The supplemental Properly adjust the active head restraints as de- side air bag is designed to inflate on the side WARNING where the vehicle is impacted. scribed earlier in this section.● Always adjust the head restraints prop- Supplemental curtain side-impact air bag erly as specified in the previous section. system: This system can help cushion the im- Failure to do so can reduce the effec- pact force to the head of occupants in front and tiveness of the active head restraint. rear outboard seating positions in certain side● Active head restraints are designed to impact collisions. The curtain side-impact air supplement other safety systems. Al- bags are designed to inflate on the side where ways wear seat belts. No system can the vehicle is impacted. prevent all injuries in any accident. These supplemental restraint systems are de- signed to supplement the crash protection pro- vided by the driver and front passenger seat belts Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-9 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 26. and are not a substitute for them. Seat beltsshould always be correctly worn and the occu-pant seated a suitable distance away from thesteering wheel, instrument panel and door finish-ers. (See “Seat belts” later in this section forinstructions and precautions on seat belt usage.)The supplemental air bags operate onlywhen the ignition switch is in the ON orSTART position.After turning the ignition key to the ONposition, the supplemental air bag warninglight illuminates. The supplemental air bagwarning light will turn off after about 7seconds if the system is operational. WRS0031 WARNING ● The seat belts and the supplemental front air bags are most effective when ● The supplemental front air bags ordi- you are sitting well back and upright in narily will not inflate in the event of a the seat. The front air bags inflate with side impact, rear impact, rollover, or great force. If you are unrestrained, lower severity frontal collision. Always leaning forward, sitting sideways or out wear your seat belts to help reduce the of position in any way, you are at risk or severity of injury in various kinds greater risk of injury or death in a crash. of accidents. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the supplemental front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel or instrument panel. Always use the seat belts.1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 27. ● The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The air bag system monitors the severity of a collision and then inflates the air bags based on belt usage. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.● Keep hands on the outside of the steer- ing wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the supplemental front air bag inflates. ARS1133 WARNING ● Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-11 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 28. ARS1041 ARS1042 ARS10431-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 29. ARS1044 ARS1045 WRS0256 WARNING ● Never install a rear-facing child re- straint in the front seat. An inflating ● Children may be severely injured or supplemental front air bag could seri- killed when the supplemental front air ously injure or kill your child. See “Child bags, side air bags or curtain side- restraints” later in this section for impact air bags inflate if they are not details. properly restrained. Pre-teens and chil- dren should be properly restrained in the rear seat, if possible. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-13 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 30. WARNING ● The seat belts, the supplemental side air bags and curtain side-impact air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag inflate with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear out- board seats to extend their hand out of SSS0101 SSS0188 the window or lean against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding WARNING positions are shown in the previous illustrations.Supplemental side air bag and curtainside-impact air bag:● The supplemental side air bag and cur- tain side-impact air bag ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal im- pact, rear impact, rollover or lower se- verity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 31. WRS0032 SSS0159 SSS0162 WARNING● When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat. If the side air bag inflates, you may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be properly restrained. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.● Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks. They may interfere with supplemental side air bag inflation. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-15 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 32. Supplemental front air bag system The driver supplemental front air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger supplemental front air bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove box. These systems are designed to meet optional certification requirements under U.S. regulations. They are also permitted in Canada. The optional certification allows the front air bags to be de- signed to inflate somewhat less forcefully than previously. However, all of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be followed. The supplemental front air bag system is de- signed to inflate in higher severity frontal colli- sions, although it may inflate if the forces in an- other type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. It may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper supple- mental front air bag system operation. WRS0168 The supplemental air bag system has dual stage1. SRS curtain side-impact air bag (right) 6. Diagnosis sensor unit inflators for both the driver and passenger air2. Supplemental side air bag modules 7. Supplemental front air bag modules bags. The system monitors information from the3. SRS curtain side-impact air bag mod- 8. Crash zone sensor crash zone sensor, the diagnosis sensor unit and seat belt buckle sensors that detect if the seat ule 9. SRS curtain side-impact air bag (left) belts are fastened. Inflator operation is based on4. Satellite sensors 10. Seat belt buckle switches the severity of a collision and whether the seat5. Seat belt pre-tensioner retractor belts are being used. Only one front air bag may1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 33. inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision. ● No unauthorized changes should beand whether the front occupants are belted or made to any components or wiring of The supplemental front air bags operateunbelted. This does not indicate improper perfor- the supplemental air bag system. This is only when the ignition switch is in the ONmance of the system. If you have any questions to prevent accidental inflation of the or START position.about the performance of your air bag system, supplemental air bag or damage to theplease contact your NISSAN dealer. After turning the ignition key to the ON supplemental air bag system. position, the supplemental air bag warningWhen the supplemental front air bag inflates, a ● Do not make unauthorized changes to light illuminates. The supplemental air bagfairly loud noise may be heard, followed by the your vehicle’s electrical system, sus- warning light will turn off after about 7 pension system or front end structure.release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and seconds if the system is operational. This could affect proper operation ofdoes not indicate a fire. Care should be taken tonot inhale it, as it may cause irritation and chok- the supplemental front air bag system. WARNINGing. Those with a history of a breathing condition ● Tampering with the supplemental frontshould get fresh air promptly. ● Do not place any objects on the steer- air bag system may result in serious ing wheel pad or on the instrument personal injury. Tampering includesSupplemental front air bags, along with the use of panel. Also, do not place any objects changes to the steering wheel and theseat belts, help to cushion the impact force on between any occupant and the steering instrument panel assembly by placingthe face and chest of the front occupants. They wheel or instrument panel. Such ob- material over the steering wheel padcan help save lives and reduce serious injuries. jects may become dangerous projec- and above the instrument panel or byHowever, an inflating front air bag may cause tiles and cause injury if the supplemen- installing additional trim materialfacial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags tal front air bag inflates. around the air bag system.do not provide restraint to the lower body. ● Immediately after inflation, severalSeat belts should be correctly worn and the front air bag system components will bedriver and passenger seated upright as far as hot. Do not touch them; you may se-practical away from the steering wheel or instru- verely burn yourself.ment panel. The supplemental front air bags in-flate quickly in order to help protect the frontoccupants. Because of this, the force of the frontair bag inflating can increase the risk of injury ifthe occupant is too close to, or is against, thefront air bag module during inflation. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-17 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 34. ● Work on and around the supplemental to those of a higher severity side impact. They are front air bag system should be done by designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electri- is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side cal equipment should also be done by a collisions. NISSAN dealer. The Supplemental Re- Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an straint System (SRS) wiring should not indication of proper supplemental side air bag be modified or disconnected. Unautho- and curtain side-impact air bag operation. rized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on When the supplemental side air bag and curtain the air bag system. side-impact air bag inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This● A cracked windshield should be re- smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. placed immediately by a qualified re- Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may pair facility. A cracked windshield could cause irritation and choking. Those with a history affect inflation of the supplemental air LRS0259 of a breathing condition should get fresh air bag system. Supplemental side-impact air bag and promptly.● The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy curtain side-impact air bags system Supplemental side air bags, along with the use of identification. seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on The supplemental side-impact air bags are lo- the chest of the front occupants. Curtain side- cated in the outside of the seatback of the frontWhen selling your vehicle, we request that you impact air bags help to cushion the impact force seats. The supplemental curtain side-impact airinform the buyer about the supplemental front air to the head of occupants in the front and rear bags are located in the side roof rails. Thesebag system and guide the buyer to the appropri- outboard seating positions. They can help save systems are designed to meet voluntary guide-ate sections in this Owner’s Manual. lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an lines to help reduce the risk of injury to out-of- inflating side air bag and curtain side-impact air position occupants. However, all of the infor- bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. mation, cautions and warnings in this Supplemental side air bags and curtain side- manual still apply and must be followed. impact air bags do not provide restraint to the The supplemental side air bags and curtain side- lower body. impact air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, although they may inflate The seat belts should be correctly worn and the if the forces in another type of collision are similar driver and passenger seated upright as far as1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 35. practical away from the supplemental side air ● Tampering with the supplemental side WARNINGbag. Rear seat passengers should be seated as air bag system may result in seriousfar away as practical from the door finishers and ● Do not place any objects near the seat- personal injury. For example, do notside roof rails. The side air bags and curtain back of the front seats. Also, do not change the front seats by placing mate-side-impact air bag inflate quickly in order to help place any objects (an umbrella, bag, rial near the seatback or by installingprotect the front occupants. Because of this, the etc.) between the front door finisher additional trim material, such as seatforce of the side air bag and curtain side-impact and the front seat. Such objects may covers, around the side air bag.air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplemental side air ● Work around and on the side air bagthe occupant is too close to, or is against, these and curtain side-impact air bag system bag inflates.air bag modules during inflation. The side air bag should be done by a NISSAN dealer.and curtain side-impact air bag will deflate ● Right after inflation, several side air bag Installation of electrical equipmentquickly after the collision is over. and curtain side-impact air bag system should also be done by a NISSAN components will be hot. Do not touch dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses*The supplemental side air bags and curtain them; you may severely burn yourself.side-impact air bags operate only when the should not be modified or discon-ignition switch is in the ON or START posi- ● No unauthorized changes should be nected. Unauthorized electrical test made to any components or wiring of equipment and probing devices shouldtions. the side air bag and curtain side-impact not be used on the side air bag system.After turning the ignition key to the ON air bag system. This is to prevent acci-position, the supplemental air bag warning dental inflation of the side air bag and * The SRS wiring harness connectors arelight illuminates. The supplemental air bag curtain side-impact air bag or damage yellow and orange for easy identification.warning light will turn off after about 7 to the side air bag and curtain side- When selling your vehicle, we request that youseconds if the system is operational. impact air bag system. inform the buyer about the supplemental side air ● Do not make unauthorized changes to bag and curtain side-impact air bag system and your vehicle’s electrical system, sus- guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this pension system or side panel. This Owner’s Manual. could affect proper operation of the supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag system. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-19 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 36. Pre-tensioner seat belt system (For ● Work around and on the pre-tensioner cause irritation and choking. Those with a historyfront seats) system should be done by a NISSAN of a breathing condition should get fresh air dealer. Installation of electrical equip- promptly. WARNING ment should also be done by a NISSAN If any abnormality occurs in the pre-tensioner dealer. Unauthorized electrical test system, the supplemental air bag warning● The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot be equipment and probing devices should light will not come on, will flash intermit- reused after activation. It must be re- not be used on the pre-tensioner seat tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on placed together with the retractor and belt system. after the ignition key has been turned to the ON or buckle as a unit. ● If you need to dispose of the pre- START position. In this case, the pre-tensioner● If the vehicle becomes involved in a tensioner or scrap the vehicle, contact a seat belt may not function properly. They must be frontal collision but the pre-tensioner is NISSAN dealer. Correct pre-tensioner checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the not activated, be sure to have the pre- disposal procedures are set forth in the nearest NISSAN dealer. tensioner system checked and, if nec- appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. When selling your vehicle, we request that you essary, replaced by your NISSAN Incorrect disposal procedures could inform the buyer about the pre-tensioner seat belt dealer. cause personal injury. system and guide the buyer to the appropriate● No unauthorized changes should be sections in this Owner’s Manual. made to any components or wiring of The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt system the pre-tensioner seat belt system. This activates in conjunction with the supplemental air is to prevent accidental activation of bag systems. Working with the seat belt retrac- the pre-tensioner seat belt or damage tor, it helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle to the pre-tensioner seat belt operation. becomes involved in certain types of collisions, Tampering with the pre-tensioner seat helping to restrain front seat occupants. belt system may result in serious per- The pre-tensioner is encased with the seat belt’s sonal injury. retractor. These seat belts are used the same as conventional seat belts. When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 37. When the ignition key is in the ON or START position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational. If any of the following conditions occur, the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag and pre- tensioner seat belt systems need servicing: ● The supplemental air bag warning light re- mains on after approximately 7 seconds. ● The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently. WRS0169 LRS0100 ● The supplemental air bag warning light does1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels (located SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG not come on at all. on the sun visors) WARNING LIGHT2. SRS Side Air Bag Warning Labels (lo- Under these conditions, the supplemental front The supplemental air bag warning light, air bag, supplemental side air bags and curtain cated on the door pillar) displaying in the instrument panel, moni- side-impact air bag or pre-tensioner seat beltSUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG tors the circuits of the supplemental front air bag, systems may not operate properly. It must beWARNING LABELS supplemental side air bag and curtain side- checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the impact air bag and pre-tensioner seat belt sys- nearest NISSAN dealer.Warning labels about the supplemental front airbag, supplemental side air bag and curtain side- tems. The circuits monitored by the supplementalimpact air bag systems are placed in the vehicle air bag warning light are the diagnosis sensoras shown in the illustration. unit, crash zone sensor, satellite sensors, front air bag modules, side air bag modules, curtain side- impact air bag modules, pre-tensioner seat belts and all related wiring. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-21 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 38. WARNING WARNINGIf the supplemental air bag warning light ● Once a supplemental front air bag,is on, it could mean that the supplemental supplemental side air bag or curtainfront air bag, supplemental side air bag, side-impact air bag has inflated, the aircurtain side-impact air bag systems bag module will not function again andand/or pre-tensioner seat belt systems must be replaced. Additionally, if any ofwill not operate in an accident. the supplemental front air bags inflate, the activated pre-tensioner seat beltsRepair and replacement procedure must also be replaced. The air bag mod- ule and pre-tensioner seat belt systemThe supplemental front air bags, supplemental should be replaced by a NISSAN dealer.side air bags, curtain side-impact air bags and The air bag module and pre-tensionerpre-tensioner seat belts are designed to inflate seat belt system cannot be repaired.on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless itis damaged, the supplemental air bag warning ● The supplemental front air bag, side airlight remains illuminated after inflation has oc- bag and curtain side-impact air bag sys-curred. Repair and replacement of these supple- tems, and the pre-tensioner seat beltmental air bag systems should be done only by a system should be inspected by a NISSAN dealer if there is any damage toNISSAN dealer. the front end or side portion of theWhen maintenance work is required on the ve- vehicle.hicle, the supplemental front air bags, supple- ● If you need to dispose of the supple-mental side air bags, curtain side-impact air mental air bag, pre-tensioner seat beltbags, pre-tensioner seat belts and related parts system or scrap the vehicle, contact ashould be pointed out to the person performing NISSAN dealer. Correct supplementalthe maintenance. The ignition key should always air bag and pre-tensioner seat belt sys-be in the LOCK position when working under the tem disposal procedures are set forth inhood or inside the vehicle. the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 39. SEAT BELTS SSS0136PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELTUSAGEIf you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-justed and you are sitting upright and well back inyour seat, your chances of being injured or killedin an accident and/or the severity of injury may begreatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encouragesyou and all of your passengers to buckle up everytime you drive, even if your seating position in-cludes a supplemental air bag.Most U.S. states and Canadian provincesor territories specify that seat belts be wornat all times when a vehicle is being driven. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-23 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 40. SSS0134 SSS0016 WARNING WARNING● Every person who drives or rides in this ● The seat belt should be properly ad- vehicle should use a seat belt at all justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may times. Children should be properly re- reduce the effectiveness of the entire strained in the rear seat and, if appro- restraint system and increase the priate, in a child restraint. chance or severity of injury in an acci- dent. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly.1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 41. ● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely ● All seat belt assemblies, including re- fastened to the proper buckle. tractors and attaching hardware, should be inspected after any collision ● Do not wear the seat belt inside out or by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom- twisted. Doing so may reduce its mends that all seat belt assemblies in effectiveness. use during a collision be replaced un- ● Do not allow more than one person to less the collision was minor and the use the same seat belt. belts show no damage and continue to ● Never carry more people in the vehicle operate properly. Seat belt assemblies than there are seat belts. not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either ● The 4-passenger model has seating and damage or improper operation is noted. seat belts for 4 occupants, 2 in the front seats and 2 in the rear seats. ● All child restraints and attaching hard- SSS0014 ware should be inspected after any col- ● If the seat belt warning light glows con- lision. Always follow the restraint WARNING tinuously while the ignition is turned manufacturer’s inspection instructions ON with all doors closed and all seat and replacement recommendations.● Always route the shoulder belt over belts fastened, it may indicate a mal- The child restraints should be replaced your shoulder and across your chest. function in the system. Have the system if they are damaged. Never run the belt behind your back, checked by a NISSAN dealer. under your arm or across your neck. The CHILD SAFETY belt should be away from your face and ● Once the pre-tensioner seat belt has neck, but not falling off your shoulder. activated, it cannot be reused and must Children need adults to help protect them. be replaced together with the retractor. They need to be properly restrained.● Position the lap belt as low and snug as See your NISSAN dealer. possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE The proper restraint depends on the child’s size. WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could ● Removal and installation of the pre- Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less increase the risk of internal injuries in tensioner seat belt system components than 20 pounds (9 kg) should be placed in rear an accident. should be done by a NISSAN dealer. facing child restraints. Front facing child re- straints are available for children who outgrow rear facing child restraints. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-25 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 42. WARNING Infants and small children WARNINGInfants and children need special protec- NISSAN recommends that infants and small chil- Never let a child stand or kneel on anytion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit dren be placed in child restraints that comply with seat and do not allow a child in the cargothem properly. The shoulder belt may Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Ca- areas while the vehicle is moving. Thecome too close to the face or neck. The nadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You child could be seriously injured or killed inlap belt may not fit over their small hip should choose a child restraint that fits your ve- an accident or sudden stop.bones. In an accident, an improperly fit- hicle and always follow the manufacturer’s in-ting seat belt could cause serious or fatal structions for installation and use. PREGNANT WOMENinjury. Always use appropriate child Larger children NISSAN recommends that pregnant women userestraints. seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug,All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri- Children who are too large for child restraints and always position the lap belt as low as pos-tories require the use of approved child restraints should be seated and restrained by the seat belts sible around the hips, not the waist. Place thefor infants and small children. See “Child Re- which are provided. shoulder belt over your shoulder and across yourstraints” later in this section. If the child’s seating position has a shoulder belt chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your that fits close to the face or neck, the use of a abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specificIn addition, there are many types of child re- recommendations.straints available for larger children which should booster seat (commercially available) may helpbe used for maximum protection. overcome this. The booster seat should raise the INJURED PERSONS child so that the shoulder belt is properly posi-NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens tioned across the top, middle portion of the NISSAN recommends that injured persons useand children be restrained in the rear seat. shoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips. The seat belts. Check with your doctor for specificAccording to accident statistics, children booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have recommendations.are safer when properly restrained in the a label certifying that it complies with Federalrear seat than in the front seat. This is Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Mo-especially important because your vehicle tor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child hashas a supplemental restraint system (Air grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or nearbag system) for the front passenger. See the face and neck, use the shoulder belt without“Supplemental restraint system” earlier in the booster seat.this section.1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 43. THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTWITH RETRACTOR WARNING● Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times.● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You WRS0174 WRS0137 could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries. Manual front seat shown ᭺ 2 Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor● For the most effective protection when Fastening the seat belts and insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the ᭺ 1 Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this The retractor is designed to lock during a section. seat and adjust the seat belt properly. sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move, and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-27 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 44. emergency locking mode. See “Child restraints” later in this section for more information. The automatic locking mode should be used only for child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by a passen- ger, the locking mode should not be acti- vated. If it is activated it may cause uncom- fortable seat belt tension. WARNING When fastening the seat belts, be certain that the seatbacks are completely se- cured in the latched position. If they are WRS0138 not completely secured, passengers may WRS0139 be injured in an accident or sudden stop.᭺3 Position the lap belt portion low and snug Unfastening the seat belts on the hips as shown. ᭺ 1 To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on᭺4 Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the the buckle. The seat belt automatically re- retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the tracts. shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest. Checking seat belt operationThe front passenger seat belt and the rear three- Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat beltpoint seat belts have a cinching mechanism for movement by two separate methods:child restraint installation. It is referred to as the ● When the seat belt is pulled quickly from theautomatic locking mode. retractor.When automatic locking mode is activated the ● When the vehicle slows down rapidly.seat belt cannot be withdrawn again until the seatbelt tongue is detached from the buckle and fullyretracted. Once retracted, the seat belt is in the1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 45. To increase your confidence in the seat belts,check the operation as follows. ● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and re- strict further belt movement.If the retractor does not lock during this check orif you have any questions about seat belt opera-tion, see a NISSAN dealer. LRS0391 LRS0242 Center of rear seat Shoulder belt height adjustment (For Selecting correct set of seat belts: front seats) The center seat belt buckle is identified by the The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad- CENTER mark. The center seat belt tongue can justed to the position best for you. (See “Precau- be fastened only into the center seat belt buckle. tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.) To adjust, pull out the adjustment button ᭺ and 1 move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired position ᭺, so the belt passes over the center of 2 the shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock the shoul- der belt anchor into position. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-29 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 46. ● Adults and children who can use the ● Periodically check to see that the seat WARNING standard seat belt should not use an belt and the metal components, such as● After adjustment, release the adjust- extender. Such unnecessary use could buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires ment button and try to move the shoul- result in serious personal injury in the and anchors, work properly. If loose parts, der belt anchor up and down to make event of an accident. deterioration, cuts or other damage on the sure it is securely fixed in position. webbing is found, the entire seat belt as- ● Never use seat belt extenders to install sembly should be replaced.● The shoulder belt anchor height should child restraints. If the child restraint is be adjusted to the position best for you. not secured properly, the child could be Failure to do so may reduce the effec- seriously injured in a collision or a sud- tiveness of the entire restraint system den stop. and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident. SEAT BELT MAINTENANCESEAT BELT EXTENDERS ● To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a mild soap solution or any solution recom-If, because of body size or driving position, it is mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seatand fasten it, an extender is available which is belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow thecompatible with the installed seat belts. The ex- seat belts to retract until they are completelytender adds approximately 8 inches (200 mm) of dry.length and may be used for either the driver or ● If dirt builds up in the shoulder beltfront passenger seating position. See a NISSAN guide of the seat belt anchors, the seatdealer for assistance if an extender is required. belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth. WARNING● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made by the same company which made the original equipment seat belts, should be used with NISSAN seat belts.1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 47. CHILD RESTRAINTS ● Never install a rear-facing child re- straint in the front seat. An inflating supplemental front air bag could seri- ously injure or kill your child. A rear- facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat. ● NISSAN recommends that the child re- straint be installed in the rear seat. Ac- cording to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. ● An improperly installed child restraint could lead to serious injury or death in ARS1098 WRS0256 an accident.PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD WARNING In general, child restraints are designed to beRESTRAINTS installed with the lap portion of a three-point type ● Infants and small children should never seat belt. In addition, this vehicle is equipped with be carried on your lap. It is not possible WARNING for even the strongest adult to resist the a universal child restraint lower anchor system, referred to as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and● Infants and small children should al- forces of a severe accident. The child Tethers for CHildren) system. Some child re- ways be placed in an appropriate child could be crushed between the adult and straints include two rigid or webbing-mounted restraint while riding in the vehicle. parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the attachments that can be connected to these Failure to use a child restraint can re- same seat belt around both your child lower anchors. For details, see the “LATCH sult in serious injury or death. and yourself. (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys- tem” later in this section. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-31 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 48. Child restraints for infants and small children of ● Follow all of the child restraint manu- ● For a front-facing child restraint, checkvarious sizes are offered by several manufactur- facturer’s instructions for installation to make sure the shoulder belt does noters. When selecting any child restraint, keep the and use. When purchasing a child re- go in front of the child’s face or neck. Iffollowing points in mind: straint, be sure to select one which will it does, put the shoulder belt behind the ● Choose only a restraint with a label certifying fit your child and vehicle. It may not be child restraint. If you must install a front that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle possible to properly install some types facing child restraint in the front seat, of child restraints in your vehicle. see “Installation on front passenger Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor seat” later in this section. Vehicle Safety Standard 213. ● If the child restraint is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being in- ● When your child restraint is not in use, ● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be jured in a collision or a sudden stop keep it secured with a seat belt to pre- sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat greatly increases. vent it from being thrown around in and seat belt system. case of a sudden stop or accident. ● Adjustable seatbacks should be posi- ● If the child restraint is compatible with your tioned to fit the child restraint, but as vehicle, place your child in the child restraint upright as possible. CAUTION and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with ● After attaching the child restraint, test it Remember that a child restraint left in a your child. Always follow all recommended before you place the child in it. Tilt it closed vehicle can become very hot. procedures. from side to side. Try to tug it forward Check the seating surface and buckles and check to see if the belt holds the before placing your child in the childAll U.S. states and provinces of Canada restraint in place. The child restraint restraint.require that infants and small children be should not move more than 1 inch. If therestrained in an approved child restraint at restraint is not secure, tighten the beltall times while the vehicle is being oper- as necessary, or put the restraint in an-ated. other seat and test it again. WARNING● Improper use of a child restraint can increase the risk or severity of injury for both the child and other occupants of the vehicle.1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 49. INSTALLATION ON REAR SEATCENTER (5-passenger models only)OR OUTBOARD POSITIONS WARNING● The three-point seat belt in your vehicle is equipped with an automatic locking mode retractor which must be used when installing a child restraint.● Failure to use the retractor’s locking mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The re- straint could tip over or otherwise be WRS0248 WRS0249 unsecured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or collision. Front Facing (outboard) — step 1 Front Facing (center for 5-passenger mod- Front facing els only) — step 1● The 4-passenger model has seating and seat belts for 4 occupants, 2 in the front When you install a child restraint in the rear seat, seats and 2 in the rear seats. Never use follow these steps: the rear console as a seating position or for a child restraint. 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. It can be placed in a front facing direction, de- pending on the size of the child. Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s instruc- tions. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-33 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 50. WRS0250 WRS0251 WRS0146 Front Facing — step 2 Front Facing — step 3 Front Facing — step 4 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child 3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is 4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the restraint and insert it into the buckle until you fully extended. At this time, the seat belt shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. hear and feel the latch engage. retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). It reverts back to Be sure to follow the child restraint manu- emergency locking mode when the seat belt facturer’s instructions for belt routing. is fully retracted.1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 51. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled. WRS0252 WRS0261 Front Facing — step 5 Rear Facing (outboard) — step 15. Before placing the child in the child restraint, Rear facing use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that When you install a child restraint in the rear seat, follow these steps: it is securely held in place. It should not move more than 1 inch (25mm). 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. The direction of the child restraint depends on6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic the type of the child restraint and the size of locking mode by trying to pull more seat belt the child. Always follow the restraint manu- out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any facturer’s instructions. more belt webbing out of the retractor, the retractor is in the automatic locking mode.7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-35 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 52. WRS0262 WRS0150 WRS0260Rear Facing (center for 5-passenger mod- Rear Facing — step 2 Rear Facing — step 3 els only) — step 1 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child 3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is restraint and insert it into the buckle until you fully extended. At this time, the seat belt hear and feel the latch engage. retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to emer- Be sure to follow the child restraint manu- gency locking mode when the seat belt is facturer’s instructions for belt routing. fully retracted.1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 53. 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled. WRS0253 WRS0254 Rear Facing — step 4 Rear Facing — step 54. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the 5. Before placing the child in the child restraint, shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. It should not move more than 1 inch (25mm). 6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more seat belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more seat belt webbing out of the retractor, the retractor is in the automatic locking mode. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-37 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 54. ● The LATCH system anchors are de- LATCH child restraints generally require the use signed to withstand only those loads of a top tether strap. See “Top tether strap child imposed by correctly fitted child re- restraint” later in this section for installation in- straints. Under no circumstance are structions. they to be used for adult seat belts or When installing a child restraint, carefully read harnesses. and follow the instructions in this manual and Some child restraints include two rigid or those supplied with the child restraint. webbing-mounted attachments that can be con- When you install a LATCH system compatible nected to two anchors located at certain seating child restraint to the lower anchor attachments, positions in your vehicle. This system is known as follow these steps: the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil- dren) system. This system may also be referred to WARNING as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. WRS0172 With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower anchor areaLATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers seat belt to secure the child restraint. Your vehicle and feeling to make sure there are nofor CHildren) SYSTEM is equipped with special anchor points that are obstructions over the LATCH system an- used with LATCH system compatible child re- chors, such as seat belt webbing or seat WARNING straints. Check your child restraint for a label cushion material. The child restraint will stating that it is compatible with the LATCH sys- not be secured properly if the LATCH sys-● Attach LATCH system compatible child tem. This information may also be in the child tem anchors are obstructed. restraints only at the locations shown. If restraint owner’s manual. If you have such a child a child restraint is not secured properly, restraint, refer to the illustration for the seating 1. To install the LATCH system compatible your child could be seriously injured or positions equipped with LATCH system anchors child restraint, insert the child restraint killed in an accident. which can be used to secure the child restraint. LATCH system anchor attachments into the● Do not secure a child restraint in the anchor points on the seat. If the child re- The LATCH system anchors are located at the center rear seating position using the straint is equipped with a top tether, see LATCH system anchors. The child re- rear of the seat cushion near the seatback. A “Top tether strap child restraint” later in this straint will not be secured properly. label is attached to the seatback to help you section for installation instructions. locate the LATCH system anchors.1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 55. 2. After attaching the child restraint and before placing the child in it, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side and tug it forward to make sure that the child restraint is securely held in place. It should not move more than 1 inch.3. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. LRS0243 LRS0296 5-passenger models 4-passenger models TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD ● After removing a rear seat head re- RESTRAINT straint for top tether installation, store it securely to prevent it from causing WARNING injury to passengers or damage to the vehicle in case of sudden braking or an ● Child restraint anchor points are de- accident. Always replace it and adjust signed to withstand only those loads properly when top tether is no longer in imposed by correctly fitted child re- use. straints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or If your child restraint has a top tether strap, it must harnesses. be secured to the anchor point provided behind its position. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-39 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 56. First, secure the child restraint with the rear seatbelt or the LATCH system (outboard positions),as applicable.Remove the head restraint from the seat back.Store it in a secure place. Flip up the anchorcover for the anchor point which is located di-rectly behind the child seat. Position the toptether strap over the top of the seat back ᭺ and 1secure it to the tether anchor bracket that pro-vides the straightest installation. Tighten thetether strap according to the manufacturer’s in-structions to remove any slack.For best child restraint fit, see the child restraintinstallation instructions in this section and the WRS0256 WRS0378child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. INSTALLATION ON FRONT ● NISSAN recommends that child re-Anchor point locations PASSENGER SEAT straints be installed in the rear seat. However, if you must install a forward-Anchor points are located on the rear parcel shelf WARNING facing child restraint in the front pas-finisher. senger seat, move the passenger seatIf you have any questions when installing a ● Never install a rear-facing child re- to the rearmost position.top strap child restraint on the rear seat, straint in the front passenger seat. Supplemental front air bags inflate with ● A child restraint with a top tether strapconsult your NISSAN dealer for details. great force. A rear-facing child restraint should not be used in the front passen- could be struck by the supplemental ger seat. front air bag in a crash and could seri- ● The three-point seat belt in your vehicle ously injure or kill your child. is equipped with an automatic locking mode retractor which must be used when installing a child restraint.1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 57. ● Failure to use the retractor’s locking mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The re- straint could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or collision. WRS0379 WRS0159 Front Facing — step 1 Front Facing — step 2 If you must install a child restraint in the front seat, 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child follow these steps: restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. 1. Position the child restraint on the front pas- senger seat. It should be placed in a Be sure to follow the child restraint manu- front-facing direction only. Move the facturer’s instructions for belt routing. seat to the rearmost position. Adjust the head restraint to its highest position. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in- structions. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direc- tion and therefore must not be used in the front seat. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-41 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 58. WRS0160 WRS0161 WRS0380 Front Facing — step 3 Front Facing — step 4 Front Facing — step 5 3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is 4. Allow the seat belt to retract slightly. Pull up 5. Before placing the child in the child restraint, fully extended. At this time, the seat belt on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in use force to tilt the child restraint from side retractor is in the automatic locking mode the belt. to side, and tug it forward to make sure that (child restraint mode). It reverts to emer- it is securely held in place. It should not move gency locking mode when the seat belt is more than 1 inch. fully retracted. 6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more seat belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the retractor is in the automatic locking mode.1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 59. 7. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.After the child restraint is removed and the seatbelt is fully retracted, the automatic locking mode(child restraint mode) is canceled. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-43 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 60. 2 Instruments and controlsInstrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Daytime running light system (Canada only) . . . . . . 2-21Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23Compass display (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Zone variation change procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Heated seats (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . 2-9 Heated steering wheel (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Traction control system (TCS) off switch Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Nissan vehicle immobilizer system (NVIS) . . . . . . . . 2-16 Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Rear center console (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 Xenon headlights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Covered storage box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Cargo nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 61. Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Homelinkா universal transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Programming HomeLinkா. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42Skyview™ roof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 Programming HomeLinkா for CanadianSunroof (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44 Automatic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 Operating the HomeLinkா universalRear sun shade (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 transceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 Reprogramming a single HomeLinkா button . . . . . . 2-44 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 62. INSTRUMENT PANEL 1. Headlight and turn signal switch (P. 2-19) 2. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3) 3. Windshield wiper/washer switch (P. 2-17) 4. Lefthand, center and righthand ventila- tors (P. 4-14) 5. Security indicator light (P. 2-14) 6. Display screen/Navigation system* (P. 4-2, P. 4-7) 7. Audio system controls (P. 4-19) 8. Climate controls (P. 4-16) 9. Front passenger supplemental air bag (P. 1-9) 10. Glove box (P. 2-31) 11. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-23) 12. Cruise control main/set switches (P. 2-23) 13. Driver supplemental air bag/horn (P. 1-9, P. 2-24) 14. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls (P. 3-14) 15. Steering wheel switch for audio control (P. 4-31) 16. Heated steering wheel switch (P. 2-25) LIC03802-2 Instruments and controls ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 63. METERS AND GAUGES17. Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch (if so equipped) or Traction con- trol system (TCS) off switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-26, P. 2-26)18. Outside mirror controls (P. 3-17)19. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-22)20. Heated seat switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-24)21. Rear sunshade switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-38)*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual (if so equipped).See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details. LIC0381 1. Warning/indicator lights 7. Odometer (total/twin trip) 2. Speedometer 8. Fuel gauge 3. Tachometer 4. Warning/indicator lights 5. Change button for trip odometer 6. Engine coolant temperature gauge Instruments and controls 2-3 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 64. LIC0382 LIC04321. Speedometer The odometer records the total distance the ve- Changing the display:2. Odometer/twin trip display hicle has been driven. Pushing the change button changes the display3. Change button The twin trip odometer records the distance of as follows:SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER individual trips. Trip → Trip → TripSpeedometer Resetting the trip odometer:The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in Pushing the change button for more than 1 sec-miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour ond resets the trip odometer to zero.(km/h).Odometer/Twin trip odometerThe odometer/twin trip odometer is displayedwhen the ignition key is in the ON position.2-4 Instruments and controls ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 65. CAUTION If the gauge indicates engine coolant tem- perature over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued opera- tion of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine. See “If your vehicle over- heats” in the “In case of emergency” sec- tion for immediate action required. LIC0383 LIC0384TACHOMETER ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREThe tachometer indicates engine speed in revo- GAUGElutions per minute (r/min). Do not rev engine into The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-the red zone ᭺.1 ture. The engine coolant temperature is within the normal range ᭺ when the gauge needle points 1 CAUTION within the zone shown in the illustration.When engine speed approaches the red The engine coolant temperature varies with thezone, shift to a higher gear. Operating theengine in the red zone may cause serious outside air temperature and driving conditions.engine damage. Instruments and controls 2-5 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 66. COMPASS DISPLAY (if so equipped) The indicates that the fuel filler lid is located on the driver’s side of the vehicle. CAUTION ● If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. After a few driving trips, the lamp should turn off. If the lamp remains on after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. LIC0385 ● For additional information, see “Mal- LIC0422FUEL GAUGE function indicator lamp (MIL)” later in When the COMPASS switch is in the ON posi- this section. tion, the compass display ᭺ will indicate the 1The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level direction the vehicle is heading.in the tank. N: northThe gauge may move slightly during braking, E: eastturning, acceleration, or going up or down hills. S: south W: westThe gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after theignition key is turned to OFF. If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in three complete circles atThe low fuel warning light comes on when the less than 5 MPH (8 km/h).amount of fuel in the tank is getting low. You can also calibrate the compass by drivingRefill the fuel tank before the gauge regis- your vehicle on your everyday route. The com-ters E (Empty). pass will be calibrated once it has tracked three complete circles.2-6 Instruments and controls ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 67. ZONE VARIATION CHANGE PROCEDURE The difference between magnetic north and geo- graphical north is known as variance. In some areas, this difference can sometimes be great enough to cause false compass readings. Follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular location if this happens: 1. Press the COMPASS switch for more than 3 seconds. The current zone number will ap- pear in the display. 2. Find your current location on the zone map. Refer to the illustration. Record the zone number. 3. Press the COMPASS switch until the new zone number appears in the display. After you stop pressing the switch in, the display will show a compass direction within a few seconds. Inaccurate compass direction: 1. With the display turned on, push the COM- PASS switch for 3 seconds, until the zone selection comes up (a number will be dis- played in the mirror compass window). 2. Toggle until correct zone is found and re-WIC0355 lease switch. Instruments and controls 2-7 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 68. 3. The display will show all segments, and re- turn to the normal compass mode within 10 seconds of no switch activity. 4. If the vehicle changes zone, repeat steps 1 through 3. See map. ● If the compass deviates from the correct indication soon after repeated adjustment, have the compass checked at an authorized dealer. ● The compass may not indicate the correct compass point in tunnels or while driving up or down a steep hill. (The compass returns to the correct compass point when the ve- hicle moves to an area where the geomag- netism is stabilized.) CAUTION● Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc., which are attached to the vehicle by means of a magnet. They affect the op- eration of the compass.● When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as it may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.2-8 Instruments and controls ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 69. WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS ANDAUDIBLE REMINDERS or Anti-lock brake warning light Low windshield washer fluid warning light High beam indicator light (Blue) Automatic transmission check warning light (if Seat belt warning light and chime Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) so equipped) or Brake warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Slip indicator light (if so equipped) Charge warning light Trunk lid open warning light Traction control system off indicator light (if so equipped) Door open warning light Automatic transmission position indicator light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights (A/T models only) Engine oil pressure warning light CRUISE main switch indicator light Vehicle dynamic control off indicator light (if so equipped) Low fuel warning light Cruise SET switch indicator lightCHECKING BULBS If equipped, the following lights come on briefly WARNING LIGHTS and then go off:With all doors closed, apply the parking brake or Anti-lock brakeand turn the ignition key to the ON position or , , , , , warning lightwithout starting the engine. The following lights If any light fails to come on, it may indicate If the light comes on while the engine is running,will come on: a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the it may indicate the anti-lock brake system is not , or , , , electrical system. Have the system repaired functioning properly. Have the system checked promptly. by a NISSAN dealer. Instruments and controls 2-9 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—skoniecz ੭
  • 70. Turn off the engine, and start it again by the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle Charge warning lightslowly turning the ignition key (quickly do- and perform the following:ing so may cause the ABS light to stay on If this light comes on while the engine is running, 1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid it may indicate the charging system is not func-when there is nothing wrong). If the light as necessary. See “Brake and clutch fluid” in tioning properly. Turn the engine off and checkstays on, have the system checked by a the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec- the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,NISSAN dealer. tion of this manual. missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSANIf an abnormality occurs in the system, the anti- dealer immediately. 2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have thelock function ceases, but the regular braking brake system checked by a NISSAN dealer.system continues to operate. CAUTIONIf the light comes on while you are driving, WARNING Do not continue driving if the generatorcontact a NISSAN dealer for repair. ● Your brake system may not be working belt is loose, broken or missing. Automatic transmission check properly if the warning light is on. Driv- ing could be dangerous. If you judge it Door open warning light warning light (if so equipped) to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, This light comes on when any of the doors are notWhen the ignition switch is turned ON, the light have your vehicle towed because driv- closed securely while the ignition key is in the ONcomes on for about 2 seconds. If the light blinksfor approximately 8 seconds, it may indicate the ing it could be dangerous. position.automatic transmission system is not functioning ● Pressing the brake pedal with the en- Engine oil pressure warningproperly. Have your NISSAN dealer check and gine stopped and/or a low brake fluidrepair the transmission. light level may increase your stopping dis- tance and braking will require greater This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the or Brake warning light pedal effort as well as pedal travel. light flickers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engineThis light functions for both the parking brake and ● If the brake fluid level is below thethe foot brake systems. immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the authorized repair shop.When the ignition key is in the ON position, the brake system has been checked at a The engine oil pressure warning light is notlight comes on when the parking brake is applied, NISSAN dealer. designed to indicate a low oil level. Use theand also warns of a low brake fluid level. If thelight comes on while the engine is running with2-10 Instruments and controls ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 71. dipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” in Seat belt warning light and ● The supplemental air bag warning lightthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of chime flashes intermittently.this manual. ● The supplemental air bag warning light does The light and chime remind you to fasten your not come on at all. CAUTION seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition key is turned to the ON or START position Unless checked and repaired, the supplementalRunning the engine with the engine oil restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre- and remains illuminated until the driver’s seat beltpressure warning light on could cause se- tensioner seat belts may not function properly.rious damage to the engine almost imme- is fastened. At the same time, the chime sounds for about 7 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt For additional details see “Supplemental restraintdiately. Such damage is not covered by system” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts andwarranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it is securely fastened. supplemental air bags” section of this manual.is safe to do so. Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags” section for pre- WARNING Low fuel warning light cautions on seat belt usage. If the supplemental air bag warning lightThis light comes on when the fuel level in the fuel Supplemental air bag warning is on, it could mean that the supplementaltank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is conve- front air bag, supplemental side air bag,nient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E light curtain side-impact air bag systems (if so(Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel When the ignition key is in the ON or START equipped) and/or pre-tensioner seat beltin the tank when the fuel gauge needle position, the supplemental air bag warning light systems will not operate in an accident.reaches E (Empty). illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational. Trunk lid open warning light Low windshield washer fluid warning light If any of the following conditions occur, the This light comes on when the trunk lid is not supplemental front air bags, supplemental side securely closed while the ignition key is in the ONThis light comes on when the windshield washer air bags, curtain side-impact air bags, and pre- position.fluid is at a low level. Add windshield washer fluid tensioner seat belt systems need servicing andas necessary. See the “Maintenance and do-it- your vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer:yourself” section of this manual. ● The supplemental air bag warning light re- mains on after approximately 7 seconds. Instruments and controls 2-11 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 72. INDICATOR LIGHTS High beam indicator light ● Malfunction indicator lamp on steady — An Automatic transmission posi- (Blue) emission control system malfunction has been detected. Check the fuel filler cap. If tion indicator light (A/T models This blue light comes on when the headlight high the fuel filler cap is loose or missing, tighten only) beams are on and goes out when the low beams or install the cap and continue to drive theWhen the ignition key is turned to the ON posi- are selected. vehicle. The lamp should turn off aftertion, the indicator in the speedometer shows the The high beam indicator light also comes on a few driving trips. If the lamp doesautomatic transmission selector lever position. when the passing signal is activated. not turn off after a few driving trips, have theSee “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting and vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. Youdriving” section of this manual. Malfunction indicator lamp do not need to have your vehicle towed to (MIL) the dealer. Cruise main switch indicator If this indicator lamp comes on steady or blinks ● Malfunction indicator lamp blinking — An light engine misfire has been detected which may while the engine is running, it may indicate aThe light comes on when the cruise control main potential emission control malfunction. damage the emission control system. To re-switch is pushed. The light goes out when the duce or avoid emission control system dam-main switch is pushed again. When the cruise The malfunction indicator lamp may also come on age:main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise steady if the fuel filler cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure – do not drive at speeds above 45 MPHcontrol system is operational. (72 km/h). the fuel filler cap is installed and closed tightly, Cruise set switch indicator and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons of fuel – avoid hard acceleration or deceleration. light in the fuel tank. – avoid steep uphill grades.The light comes on while the vehicle speed is After a few driving trips, the lamp should turn off if no other potential emission control – if possible, reduce the amount of cargocontrolled by the cruise control system. If the light being hauled or towed.blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate system malfunction exists.the cruise control system is not functioning prop- Operation The malfunction indicator lamp may stop blinkingerly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected by The malfunction indicator lamp will come on in a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have yourdealer. vehicle towed to the dealer. one of two ways:2-12 Instruments and controls ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—skoniecz ੭
  • 73. CAUTION Traction control system off Vehicle dynamic control off indicator light (if so equipped) indicator light (if so equipped)Continued vehicle operation without hav-ing the emission control system checked This indicator light comes on when the traction This indicator light comes on when the vehicleand repaired as necessary could lead to control off switch is pushed to OFF. This indi- dynamic control off switch is pushed to OFF. Thispoor driveability, reduced fuel economy, cates the traction control system is not operating. indicates the vehicle dynamic control system isand possible damage to the emission con- not operating.trol system. Push the traction control off switch again or re- start the engine and the system will operate nor- Push the vehicle dynamic control off switch again Slip indicator light (if so mally. See “Traction control system (TCS)” in the or restart the engine and the system will operate normally. See “Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) equipped) “Starting and driving” section of this manual. system” in the “Starting and driving” section ofThis indicator light will blink when the traction The traction control light also comes on when you this manual.control system is limiting wheel spin. Slippery turn the ignition key to the ON position. The light The vehicle dynamic control light also comes onroad conditions may exist if the slip indicator will turn off after about 2 seconds if the traction when you turn the ignition key to the ON position.blinks on. If this happens, adjust your driving control system (TCS) is operational. If the light The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if theaccordingly. stays on or comes on along with the SLIP indica- system is operational. If the light stays on or tor light while you are driving, have the traction comes on along with the SLIP indicator lightThe slip indicator light also comes on when you control system checked by a NISSAN dealer. while you are driving, have the vehicle dynamicturn the ignition key to the ON position. The light control system checked by a NISSAN dealer.will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is While the traction control system is operating,operational. If the light does not come on or go you might feel slight vibration or hear the system While the vehicle dynamic control system is op-off, have the traction control system checked by a working when starting the vehicle or accelerat- erating, you might feel slight vibration or hear theNISSAN dealer. ing, but this is normal. system working when starting the vehicle or ac- celerating, but this is normal.The system operates in all transmission shift lever Turn signal/hazard indicatorpositions, but the system can upshift the trans- lightsmission only as high as the indicated shift lever The appropriate light flashes when the turn signalposition. switch is activated. Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned on. Instruments and controls 2-13 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 74. SECURITY SYSTEMSAUDIBLE REMINDERSBrake pad wear warningThe front disc brake pads have audible wearwarnings. When a front brake pad requires re-placement, it makes a high pitched scrapingsound when the vehicle is in motion, whether ornot the brake pedal is depressed. Have thebrakes checked as soon as possible if the warn-ing sound is heard.Key reminder chimeA chime sounds if the driver’s door is openedwhile the key is left in the ignition switch. Removethe key and take it with you when leaving the LIC0301 LIC0387vehicle. Your vehicle has two types of security systems: Security indicator light (Vehicle secu-Light reminder chime ● Vehicle security system rity system)With the ignition switch in the OFF position, a ● NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System—NVIS The security indicator light ᭺ is located on the 1chime sounds when the driver’s door is opened if instrument panel near the windshield.the headlights or parking lights are on. VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM The security indicator light shows the status ofTurn the headlight control switch off before leav- The vehicle security system provides visual and the vehicle security system.ing the vehicle. audio alarm signals if parts of the vehicle are disturbed. The light operates whenever the ignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF, or ACC position. The vehicle security system has four phases. For each phase the operation of the security indicator light is different.2-14 Instruments and controls ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 75. 3. Close the trunk lid and all doors. Lock all 4. Confirm that the SECURITY indicator light doors. The doors can be locked with the key, comes on. The SECURITY light stays on for power door lock switch or with the keyfob. about 30 seconds. The vehicle security sys- tem is now pre-armed. After about 30 sec- Keyfob operation: onds the vehicle security system automati- ● Push the button on the keyfob. cally shifts into the armed phase. The All doors lock. The hazard lights flash SECURITY light begins to flash once every 3 twice and the horn beeps once to indicate seconds. If, during the 30-second pre-arm all doors are locked. time period, the door is unlocked by the key or the keyfob, or the ignition key is turned to ● When the button is pushed with ACC or ON, the system will not arm. all doors locked, the hazard lights flash ● If the key is turned slowly when locking twice and the horn beeps once as a re- the door, the system may not arm. Fur- minder that the doors are already locked. thermore, if the key is turned beyond The horn may or may not beep. Refer to the vertical position toward the unlock “Personalized settings menu” (vehicles with- position to remove the key, the system out navigation system) or “Vehicle electronic may be disarmed when the key is re- systems” (vehicles with navigation system) moved. If the indicator light fails to in the “Display screen, heater, air conditioner glow for 30 seconds, unlock the door once and lock it again. and audio systems” section later in this manual. ● Even when the driver and/or passen- gers are in the vehicle, the system will LIC0053 arm with all doors and trunk lid closed and locked with the ignition key in theHow to arm the vehicle security sys- OFF position.tem 1. Close all windows. (The system can be armed even if the windows are open.) 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Instruments and controls 2-15 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 76. Vehicle security system activation NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER Statement related to Section 15 of FCC SYSTEM (NVIS) Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-The vehicle security system will give the following tem (CONT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER, ANTalarm: The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (NVIS) ASSY — IMMOBILIZER) ● The headlights blink and the horn sounds will not allow the engine to start without the use of a registered NVIS key. This device complies with part 15 of the intermittently. FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry ● The alarm automatically turns off after ap- If the engine fails to start using a registered NVIS Canada. Operation is subject to the follow- proximately 1 minute. However, the alarm key (for example, when interference is caused by ing two conditions; reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with another NVIS key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), (1) This device may not cause harmful in- again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking terference, and (2) this device must accept a door with the key, or by pressing the restart the engine using the following proce- dures: any interference received, including inter- button on the keyfob. ference that may cause undesired opera-The alarm is activated by: 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position tion of the device. for approximately 5 seconds. ● opening the door or trunk lid without using CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX- the key or keyfob (even if the door is un- 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE MANUFAC- locked by releasing the door inside lock position, and wait approximately 5 seconds. TURER FOR COMPLIANCE COULD VOID switch) or opening the trunk lid by operating THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPERATE 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2. the opener lever. THE EQUIPMENT. 4. Restart the engine while holding the deviceHow to stop an activated alarm (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered NVIS key.The alarm stops only by unlocking a door with thekey, or by pressing the button on the key- If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-fob. ommends placing the registered NVIS key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices.2-16 Instruments and controls ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 77. WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH NVIS service as soon as possible. Please bring all NVIS keys that you have when visiting your NISSAN dealer for service. LIC0387 LIC0386Security indicator light (NISSAN Ve- SWITCH OPERATIONhicle Immobilizer System) The windshield wiper and washer operates whenThe security indicator light ᭺ is located on the 1 the ignition switch is in the ON position.instrument panel near the windshield. Push the lever down to operate the wiper at theThe security indicator light blinks every 3 sec- following speed:onds whenever the ignition switch is in theLOCK, OFF or ACC position. This function indi- ᭺ 1 Intermittent — intermittent operation can be adjusted by turning the knob toward ᭺ Acates the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (Slower) or ᭺ (Faster). Also, the intermit- B(NVIS) is operational. tent operation speed varies in accordanceIf the NVIS is malfunctioning, the light will remain with the vehicle speed. (For example, whenon while the ignition key is in the ON position. the vehicle speed is high, the intermittent operation speed will be faster.)If the light still remains on and/or the en-gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for Instruments and controls 2-17 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 78. REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR (if so equipped) DEFROSTER SWITCHNOTE: ● Do not operate the washer if the reser-You can turn on or turn off the driving voir tank is empty.speed dependent intermittent wiper func- ● Do not fill the window washer reservoirtion. Refer to “Personalized settings tank with washer fluid concentrates atmenu” (vehicles without navigation sys- full strength. Some methyl alcoholtem) or “Vehicle electronic systems” (ve- based washer fluid concentrates mayhicles with navigation system) in the “Dis- permanently stain the grille if spilledplay screen, heater, air conditioner and while filling the window washer reser-audio systems” section later in this manual. voir tank.᭺2 Low — continuous low speed operation ● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer’s recom-᭺3 High — continuous high speed operation mended levels before pouring the fluidPush the lever up ᭺ to have one sweep opera- 4 into the window washer reservoir tank.tion of the wiper. Do not use the window washer reservoir LIC0388 tank to mix the washer fluid concen- To defrost the rear window glass and outsidePull the lever toward you ᭺ to operate the 5 trate and water. mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine andwasher. The wiper will also operate several times. push the rear window defroster switch on. The rear window defroster indicator light on the WARNING switch comes on. Push the switch again to turnIn freezing temperatures the washer solu- the defroster off.tion may freeze on the windshield and The rear window defroster automatically turns offobscure your vision which may lead to an after approximately 15 minutes.accident. Warm the windshield with thedefroster before you wash the windshield. CAUTION CAUTION When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or dam-● Do not operate the washer continu- age the rear window defroster. ously for more than 30 seconds.2-18 Instruments and controls ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 79. HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCHNOTE: XENON HEADLIGHTS (if so (for example, when the vehicle stops at equipped) a traffic signal). Even when the daytimeThe top few rows of wires on the rear win- running lights are active (Canada only),dow are not part of the rear window de- the xenon headlights do not turn on.froster system. These wires make up the WARNING This way the life of the xenon head-antenna for the audio system. ᏘHIGH VOLTAGE lights is not reduced. ● When xenon headlights are on, they ● If the xenon headlight bulb is close to produce a high voltage. To prevent an burning out, the brightness will drasti- electric shock, never attempt to modify cally decrease, the light will start blink- or disassemble. Always have your xe- ing, or the color of the light will be- non headlights replaced at a NISSAN come reddish. If one or more of the dealer. above signs appear, contact a NISSAN dealer. ● Xenon headlights provide considerably more light than conventional head- lights. If they are not correctly aimed, they might temporarily blind an oncom- ing driver or the driver ahead of you and cause a serious accident. If headlights are not aimed correctly, immediately take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer and have the headlights adjusted correctly. When the xenon headlight is initially turned on, its brightness or color varies slightly. However, the color and brightness will soon stabilize. ● The life of xenon headlights will be shortened by frequent on-off opera- tion. It is generally desirable not to turn off the headlights for short intervals Instruments and controls 2-19 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 80. NOTE: Autolight activation sensitivity and the time delay for autolight shutoff can be ad- justed. See “Personalized settings menu” (vehicles without navigation system) or “Vehicle electronic systems” (vehicles with navigation system) in the “Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems” section later in this manual. To turn on the autolight system: 1. Make sure the headlight switch is in the AUTO position. LIC0389 LIC0424 2. Turn the ignition key to ON.HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH Autolight system 3. The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off.Lighting The autolight sensor ᭺ is located on the instru- 1 ment panel. Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF and a᭺1 When turning the switch to the posi- door is opened and left open, the headlights tion, the front parking, tail, license plate and The autolight system allows the headlights to be remain ON for 5 minutes. If another door is instrument panel lights come on. set so they turn on and off automatically. The opened during the 5 minutes, then the 5 minute autolight system can:᭺2 When turning the switch to the posi- timer is reset. tion, the headlights come on and all the other ● Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail, To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to lights remain on. license plate and instrument panel lights au- the OFF, , or position. tomatically when it is dark. Be sure you do not put anything on top of ● Turn off all the lights when it is light. the autolight sensor located in the top ● Keep all the lights on for up to 180 seconds driver side of the instrument panel. The after you turn the key to OFF and all doors autolight sensor controls the autolight; if it are closed. is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as if2-20 Instruments and controls ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 81. it is dark out and the headlights will illumi- CAUTIONnate. If this occurs while parked with theengine off and the key in the ON position, ● Be sure to turn the light switch to theyour vehicle’s battery could become dis- OFF position when you leave the ve-charged. hicle for extended periods of time, oth- erwise the battery will go dead. ● Never leave the light switch on when the engine is not running for extended periods of time even if the headlights turn off automatically. DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM (Canada only) LIC0390 The daytime running lights automatically illumi- nate when the engine is started with the parking Headlight beam select brake released. The daytime running lights oper- ᭺ 1 To select the high beam function, push the ate with the headlight switch in the OFF position lever forward. The high beam lights come on or in the position. Turn the headlight switch and the light illuminates. to the AUTO or position for headlight illu- mination when driving at night. ᭺ 2 Pull the lever back to select the low beam. If the parking brake is applied before the engine is ᭺ 3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the started, the daytime running lights do not illumi- headlight high beams on and off. nate. The daytime running lights illuminate when Battery saver system the parking brake is released. The daytime run- ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch If the ignition switch is turned OFF while the is turned off. headlight switch is in the or posi- tion, the headlights will turn off after 5 minutes. Instruments and controls 2-21 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 82. WARNINGWhen the daytime running light system isactive, tail lights on your vehicle are noton. It is necessary at dusk to turn on yourheadlights. Failure to do so could causean accident injuring yourself and others. LIC0392 LIC0391 INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS TURN SIGNAL SWITCH CONTROL Turn signal The instrument cluster illuminates when the igni- tion switch is in ON position. ᭺ 1 Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction. When the turn is com- The instrument brightness control operates when pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically. the headlight control switch is in the AUTO, or position. Lane change signal Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instru- ᭺ 2 To signal a lane change, move the lever up or ment panel lights when driving at night. down to the point where the indicator light begins to flash, but the lever does not latch. The instrument brightness control will not adjust the brightness when the headlights or parking lights are off.2-22 Instruments and controls ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 83. HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH LIC0393 AIC0102 LIC0394FOG LIGHT SWITCH CORNERING LIGHT Push the switch on to warn other drivers whenTo turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch The cornering light provides additional illumina- you must stop or park under emergency condi-to the position, then turn the fog light tion toward the turning direction. The cornering tions. All turn signal lights flash.switch to the position. To turn them off, light will illuminate on the turning direction sideturn the fog light switch to the OFF position. when a turn is signaled with the headlights on. WARNINGThe headlights must be on for the fog lights to ● If stopping for an emergency, be sure tooperate. move the vehicle well off the road. ● Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic. Instruments and controls 2-23 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 84. HORN HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)● Turn signals do not work when the haz- ard warning flasher lights are on.The flashers will operate with the ignition switchin any position.Some state laws may prohibit the use ofthe hazard warning flasher switch whiledriving. LIC0395 LIC0136 To sound the horn, push the center pad area of The front and rear seats are warmed by built-in the steering wheel. heaters (if so equipped). The switches are lo- cated on the center consoles. WARNING 1. Start the engine. Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so could affect proper operation of the 2. Push the low or high position of the switch, supplemental front air bag system. Tam- as desired. The indicator light in the switch pering with the supplemental front air bag will illuminate. system may result in serious personal The heater is controlled by a thermostat, injury. automatically turning the heater on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on.2-24 Instruments and controls ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 85. HEATED STEERING WHEEL (if so equipped)3. When the seat is warmed or before you ● The battery could run down if the seat leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch heater is operated while the engine is off. not running. CAUTION● Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat.● Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush- ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated.● Do not place anything hard or heavy on LIC0421 the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the The heated steering wheel system is designed to heater. operate only when the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below approximately 68°F● Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a (20°C). dry cloth. Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm● When cleaning the seat, never use the steering wheel after the engine starts. The gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi- indicator light will come on. lar materials. If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is● If any abnormalities are found or the below 68°F (20°C), the system will heat the heated seat does not operate, turn the steering wheel to approximately 86°F (30°C), switch off and have the system checked then turn off automatically. by your NISSAN dealer. Push the switch again to turn the heated steering off manually. The indicator light will go off. Instruments and controls 2-25 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 86. TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS) VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFF SWITCH (if so equipped) OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)NOTE:If the surface temperature of the steeringwheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the switchis turned on, the system will not heat thesteering wheel. This is not a malfunction. LIC0451 WIC0534 The vehicle should be driven with the Traction Con- The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle trol System (TCS) on for most driving conditions. Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv- When the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the ing conditions. TCS reduces the engine output to reduce wheel If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC spin. The engine speed will be reduced even if system reduces the engine output to reduce the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maxi- wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced mum engine power is needed to free a stuck even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If vehicle, turn the TCS off. maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck To turn off the TCS, push the TCS OFF switch. vehicle, turn the VDC system off. The indicator will come on. To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF Push the “TCS OFF” switch again or restart the switch. The indicator will come on. engine and the system will operate normally. See “Traction control system (TCS)” in the “Starting Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the and driving” section. engine and the system will operate normally. See2-26 Instruments and controls ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 87. POWER OUTLET“Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system” in the“Starting and driving” section. LIC0396 LIC0398 Passenger compartment Front center console – Type A The power outlets are for powering electrical ● Do not use with accessories that ex- accessories such as cellular telephones. They ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. are rated at 12 Volts 120 Watts maximum. Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory. You can route a power cord through the opening ᭺ on the passenger compartment access panel. 1 ● Use this power outlet with the engine running. (If the engine is stopped, this CAUTION could result in a discharged battery.) ● The outlet and plug may be hot during ● Avoid using when the air conditioner, or immediately after use. headlights or rear window defroster is on. ● This power outlet is not designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Instruments and controls 2-27 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 88. STORAGE LIC0602 LIC0397 LIC0016 Front center console – Type B Rear center console (if so equipped) SEATBACK POCKETS● Before inserting or disconnecting a The seatback pockets are located on the back of plug, be sure the electrical accessory the driver and passenger seats. The pockets can being used is turned OFF. be used to store maps.● Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may blow.● When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water to contact the outlet.2-28 Instruments and controls ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 89. ● Do not leave sunglasses in the sun- glasses holder while parking in direct sunlight. The heat may damage the sunglasses. LIC0399 LIC0400SUNGLASSES HOLDER Front CUP HOLDERSTo open the sunglasses holder, push and release. To open the front cup holders, push the cup WARNING holder lid. To close, lower the cup holder lid and push down until it clicks in place.The sunglasses case should not be usedwhile driving so full attention may be The plastic cup insert may be removed for clean-given to vehicle operation. ing. The rear cup holders are located in the fold-down CAUTION armrest in the rear seat back or in the rear center● Do not use for anything other than console. sunglasses. Instruments and controls 2-29 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 90. CAUTION ● Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger. ● Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects can injure you in an accident. LIC0423 LIC0402 Rear fold-down armrest Rear center consoleTo open the cup holders on the rear fold-down To open the cup holders on the rear center con-armrest, lift the cup holder lid. To close, lower the sole, push the button. The cup holder lid willlid. open. To close, gently push the lid toward the center. WARNING The cup holder should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.2-30 Instruments and controls ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 91. CONSOLE BOX WARNING The center console box should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. CAUTION ● This power outlet is not designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit. ● Do not use accessories that exceed 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. Do not use LIC0403 double adapters or more than one elec- LIC0404 trical accessory.GLOVE BOX ArmrestOpen the glove box by pulling the handle. Use the Push the button to elevate the armrest. To returnmaster key when locking ᭺ or unlocking ᭺ the 1 2 armrest to regular position, hold the button in andglove box. The valet key cannot be used to lock or push the armrest rearward until locked.unlock the glove box. WARNINGKeep glove box lid closed while driving tohelp prevent injury in an accident or asudden stop. Instruments and controls 2-31 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 92. LIC0405 LIC0426 WIC0697Console box storage REAR CENTER CONSOLE (if so Some rear center consoles are equipped with a equipped) light inside the console box. The light may bePull up on the lever to open the console box. turned on ᭺ and off ᭺ with the switch. 1 2Remove the inside tray to store a large object. Pull up on the lever to open the console box.The console box may be used for storage ofcellular phones. Open the access hole cover ᭺ 1to route a cord to the power outlet.2-32 Instruments and controls ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 93. LIC0406 LIC0425COVERED STORAGE BOX CARGO NETS WARNINGPush the bottom center of the lid to open. The cargo nets (right, center and left) help keep ● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or packages in the cargo area from moving around straps to help prevent it from sliding or while the vehicle is in motion. shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal To install a cargo net, attach the hooks to the injury. retainers. ● Be sure to secure all four hooks into the To remove a cargo net, detach the hooks from the retainers. The cargo restrained in the retainers. net must not exceed 30 lbs. (13.6 kg) or the net may not stay secured. Instruments and controls 2-33 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 94. WINDOWSPOWER WINDOWS is opened during this period of about 45 sec- onds, power to the windows is canceled. To open WARNING a window, push the switch and hold it down. To close a window, pull the switch and hold it up. To● Make sure that all passengers have stop the opening or closing function at any time, their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while simply release the switch. it is in motion and before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch NOTE: to prevent unexpected use of the power windows. The default for retained power is 45 sec- onds. The retained power can be disabled● Do not leave children unattended inside or adjusted to 2 minutes. See your NISSAN the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac- dealer to have the retained power adjusted. tivate switches or controls and become trapped in a window. Unattended chil- dren could become involved in serious LIC0407 accidents. 1. Door lock/unlock button 2. Window lock button 3. Front passenger side 4. Right rear passenger side 5. Left rear passenger side 6. Driver side automatic switch Driver’s side power window switch The driver’s side control panel is equipped with switches to open or close all of the windows. The power windows operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position, or for about 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s door2-34 Instruments and controls ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 95. LIC0408 LIC0409 LIC0410Front passenger power window switch Rear power window switch Automatic operationThe passenger window switch operates only the The rear passenger window switches open or To fully open a window equipped with automaticcorresponding passenger window. To open the close only the corresponding passenger window. operation, press the window switch down (onlywindow, push the switch and hold it down ᭺. To 1 To open the window, push the switch and hold it driver’s side shown) to the second detent andclose the window, pull the switch up ᭺. 2 down ᭺. To close the window, pull the switch up 1 release it; it need not be held. The window auto- ᭺. 2 matically opens all the way. To stop the window, Locking passengers’ windows lift the switch up while the window is opening. When the window lock button is depressed, only To fully close a window equipped with automatic the driver side window can be opened or closed. operation, pull the switch up to the second detent Push it again to cancel the window lock function. and release it; it need not be held. Auto-reverse function The auto-reverse function can be activated when a window is closed by automatic operation. Instruments and controls 2-35 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 96. SKYVIEW™ ROOF (if so equipped) SUNROOF (if so equipped)Depending on the environment or drivingconditions, the auto-reverse function maybe activated if an impact or load similar tosomething being caught in the window oc-curs. WARNINGThere are some small distances immedi-ately before the closed position whichcannot be detected. Make sure that allpassengers have their hands, etc., insidethe vehicle before closing the window.If the control unit detects something caught in awindow equipped with automatic operation as it LIC0411 LIC0412is closing, the window will be immediately low- Open or close the skyview roof shade by sliding it Type Aered. from side to side. AUTOMATIC SUNROOF The sunroof will only operate when the ignition key is in the ON position. The automatic sunroof is operational for about 45 seconds, even if the ignition key is turned to the ACC or OFF position. If the driver’s door or the front passenger’s door is opened during this period of about 45 sec- onds, power to the sunroof is canceled.2-36 Instruments and controls ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 97. Tilting the sunroof position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the OFF position. To tilt the sunroof up, push the tilt switch to the or UP position ᭺. When the roof is 3 Depending on the environment or driving open, it will automatically close and then tilt up. To conditions, the auto reverse function may tilt the sunroof down, push the tilt switch to be activated if an impact or load similar to the or DOWN position ᭺. 4 something being caught in the sunroof oc- curs. Restarting the sunroof sliding switch The sliding switch will become inoperable after WARNING the battery terminal is disconnected, the electri- There are some small distances immedi- cal supply interrupted and/or some abnormality ately before the closed position which detected. Use the following reset procedure to cannot be detected. Make sure that all return sunroof operation to normal. passengers have their hands, etc., inside WIC0698 the vehicle before closing the sunroof. Type B 1. If the sunroof lid is open, push the tilting switch repeatedly toward or DOWN When closing:Sliding the sunroof to fully close the lid. If the control unit detects something caught in theTo open the roof, slide the switch to the or 2. Finally, push and hold the tilting switch for sunroof as it moves to the front, the sunroof willOPEN position ᭺. When the roof is tilted up, it 1 more than 2 seconds toward or immediately open backward.will automatically tilt down and then open. DOWN to reestablish the lid’s home posi- When tilting down:To close the roof, slide the switch to the or tion.CLOSE position ᭺. 2 If the control unit detects something caught in the The sunroof should now operate normally. sunroof as it tilts down, the sunroof will immedi-The position of the sliding roof lid can be chosen Auto reverse function (when closing or ately tilt up.by the position of the sliding switch. tilting down the sunroof) If the auto reverse function malfunctions and re-To fully open or close the roof, completely move peats opening or tilting up the sunroof, keepthe switch to the open or closed position. The auto reverse function can be activated when pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds the sunroof is closed or tilted down by automatic operation when the ignition key is in the ON Instruments and controls 2-37 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 98. REAR SUN SHADE (if so equipped)after it happens, then the sunroof will fully close CAUTIONgradually. In this case, make sure nothing iscaught in the sunroof. ● To avoid personal injury, keep your hands, fingers and head away from the WARNING sun shade arm, arm rail and screen inlet port.● In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open sunroof. ● Do not allow children near the rear sun Always use seat belts and child shade system. They could be injured. restraints. ● Do not place objects on or near the rear● Do not allow anyone to stand up or sun shade. This could cause improper extend any portion of their body out of operation or damage it. the sunroof opening while the vehicle is ● Do not pull or push the rear sun shade. in motion or while the sunroof is This could cause improper operation or closing. damage it. CAUTION● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand from the sunroof before opening.● Do not place heavy objects on the sun- roof or surrounding area.Sun shadeOpen and close the sun shade by sliding it for-ward or backward.If the sunroof does not closeHave your NISSAN dealer check and repair thesunroof. LIC04182-38 Instruments and controls ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 99. INTERIOR LIGHT1. Arm rail ● Do not hang any object on the arm rail2. Screen as this may result in improper operation3. Caution label or damage the screen.4. Sun shade arms ● Do not forcefully pull the screen. DoingThe rear sun shade operates when the ignition so may elongate the screen. Improperkey is in the ACC or ON position. operation or damage to the screen may result.The rear sun shade switches are located on thefront and rear center consoles.To raise the screen, push the upper side of theswitch.To lower the screen, push the lower side of theswitch. LIC0413The switch need not be held down. Without sunroof CAUTION The interior light has a three-position switch and operates regardless of ignition switch position.● Do not place objects (such as newspa- pers, handkerchiefs, etc.) on the screen ● When the switch is in the ON position ᭺, 1 inlet port. Doing so may entangle these the interior light illuminates, regardless of objects in the screen when it is extend- door position. The light will go off after 30 ing or retracting, causing improper op- minutes unless the ignition key is in the ACC eration or damage to the screen. or ON position.● Do not push the sun shade arm with your hands, etc., as this may deform it. Improper operation or damage to the screen may result. Instruments and controls 2-39 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 100. PERSONAL LIGHTS The lights will go off when the ignition key is in the ON position, or the driver’s door is closed and locked. The lights will also go off after 30 minutes when doors are open. ● When the switch is in the OFF position ᭺, 3 the interior light does not illuminate, regard- less of door position. NOTE: The foot well and door step lights illumi- nate when the driver and passenger doors are opened regardless of the interior light LIC0414 switch position. These lights will turn off LIC0416 automatically after 30 minutes while doors With sunroof Models without sunroof are open to prevent the battery from be- ● When the switch is in the center DOOR coming discharged. FRONT position ᭺, the front and rear personal 2 lights will illuminate under the following con- To turn the map lights on, press the switches. To CAUTION turn them off, press the switches again. ditions: Do not use for extended periods of time – Driver’s door is unlocked. with the engine stopped. This could result CAUTION Lights remain on for a maximum of 30 in a discharged battery. Do not use for extended periods of time seconds. with the engine stopped. This could result – Driver’s door is opened. in a discharged battery. Lights remain on for a maximum of 30 seconds after driver’s door is closed. – Ignition key is removed from key cylinder. Lights remain on for a maximum of 30 seconds.2-40 Instruments and controls ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 101. TRUNK LIGHT The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the light goes off. For bulb replacement procedures, refer to “Bulb replacement” in the “Maintenance and do-it- yourself” section of this manual. LIC0415 LIC0417 Models with sunroof REARConsole light To turn on both personal reading lights, press the switch to the position ᭺. To turn the lights 1The console light ᭺ will turn on whenever the 1 off, return the switch to the center position.headlights are illuminated. To turn the consolelight off while the headlights are illuminated, push To turn on a single personal reading light, pressthe interior light switch to the OFF position. the switch to the position ᭺. To turn a 2 single personal reading light off, return the switch to the center position. Instruments and controls 2-41 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 102. HOMELINKா UNIVERSALTRANSCEIVERThe HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver provides a WARNINGconvenient way to consolidate the functions of upto three individual hand-held transmitters into ● Do not use the HomeLinkா Universalone built-in device. Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and re-HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver: verse features as required by federal ● Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF) safety standards. (These standards be- devices such as garage doors, gates, home came effective for opener models manufactured after April 1, 1982). A ga- and office lighting, entry door locks and se- rage door opener which cannot detect curity systems. an object in the path of a closing garage ● Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No door and then automatically stop and separate batteries are required. If the vehi- reverse, does not meet current federal cle’s battery is discharged or is discon- safety standards. Using a garage door nected, HomeLinkா will retain all program- opener without these features in- LIC0419 ming. creases the risk of serious injury or death. PROGRAMMING HOMELINKாOnce the HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver 1. To begin, press and hold the two outer ● During the programming procedureis programmed, retain the original trans- HomeLinkா buttons (to clear the memory) your garage door or security gate willmitter for future programming procedures open and close (if the transmitter is until the indicator light ᭺ blinks slowly (after 1(i.e., new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of within range). Make sure that people or 20 seconds). Release both buttons.the vehicle, the programmed HomeLinkா objects are clear of the garage door,Universal Transceiver buttons should be 2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter gate, etc. that you are programming. 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from theerased for security purposes. For addi- ● Your vehicle’s engine should be turned HomeLinkா surface.tional information refer to “ProgrammingHomeLinkா” later in this section. off while programming the HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver.2-42 Instruments and controls ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 103. 4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator NOTE: light on the HomeLinkா flashes, changing Once you have pressed and released the from a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashing program button on the garage door open- blink”. This could take up to 90 seconds. er’s motor and the “training light” is lit, you When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7. buttons may be released. The rapidly flash- Use the help of a second person for conve- ing light indicates successful programming. nience to assist when performing this step. To activate the garage door or other pro- grammed device, press and hold the pro- 7. Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas- grammed HomeLinkா button — releasing ing the garage door opener program button, quickly and firmly press and release the when the device begins to activate. HomeLinkா button you’ve just programmed. 5. If the indicator light on the HomeLinkா blinks Press and release the HomeLinkா button up rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid, to 3 times to complete the training. LIC0420 HomeLinkா has picked up a “rolling code” 8. Your HomeLinkா button should now be pro-3. Using both hands, simultaneously press and garage door opener signal. You will need to grammed. (To program the remaining hold both the HomeLinkா button you want to proceed with the next steps to train the HomeLinkா buttons for additional door or program and the hand-held transmitter but- HomeLinkா to complete the programming gate openers, follow steps 2-8 only.) ton. which may require a ladder and another per- son for convenience. NOTE: DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has been completed. 6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn” pro- Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to gram button located on the garage door “clear” all previously programmed opener’s motor to activate the “training HomeLinkா buttons. mode”. This button is usually located near If you have any questions or are having difficulty the antenna wire that hangs down from the programming your HomeLinkா buttons, please motor. If the wire originates from under a refer to the HomeLinkா web site at: light lens, you will need to remove the lens to www.homelink.com or call 1-800-NISSAN-1 (1- access the program button. 800-647-7261). Instruments and controls 2-43 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 104. PROGRAMMING HOMELINKா FOR PROGRAMMING TROUBLE- CLEARING THE PROGRAMMEDCANADIAN CUSTOMERS DIAGNOSIS INFORMATIONPrior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand- If the HomeLinkா does not quickly learn the hand- Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However,held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec- held transmitter information: to clear all programming, press and hold the twoonds. To program your hand-held transmitter to outside buttons and release when the indicator ● replace the hand-held transmitter batteriesHomeLinkா, continue to press and hold the light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds). with new batteries.HomeLinkா button (note steps 2 - 4 under “Pro-gramming HomeLinkா”) while you press and re- ● position the hand-held transmitter with its REPROGRAMMING A SINGLEpress (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitters every battery area facing away from the HOMELINKா BUTTON2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly HomeLinkா surface. To reprogram a HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver(indicating successful programming). ● press and hold both the HomeLinkா and button, complete the following.NOTE: hand-held transmitter buttons without inter- 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkா but- ruption. ton. Do not release the button until step 4When programming a garage door opener, ● position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 has been completed.etc., it is advised to unplug the device dur-ing the “cycling” process to prevent pos- inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the 2. When the indicator light begins to flashsible damage to the garage door opener HomeLinkா surface. Hold the transmitter in slowly (after 20 seconds), position thecomponents. that position for up to 15 seconds. If hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 HomeLinkா is not programmed within that mm) away from the HomeLinkா surface.OPERATING THE HOMELINKா time, try holding the transmitter in anotherUNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER position – keeping the indicator light in view 3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter at all times. button.The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver (once pro-grammed) may now be used to activate the ga- If you continue to have programming difficulties, 4. The HomeLinkா indicator light will flash, firstrage door, etc. To operate, simply press the ap- please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs slowly and then rapidly. When the indicatorpropriate programmed HomeLinkா Universal Department. The phone numbers are located in light begins to flash rapidly, release bothTransceiver button. The red indicator light will the Foreword of this manual. buttons.illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.2-44 Instruments and controls ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 105. The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver button has proved by the party responsible for compli-now been reprogrammed. The new device can ance could void the user’s authority to op-be activated by pushing the HomeLinkா button erate the device.that was just programmed. This procedure will DOC: ISTC 1763K1313not affect any other programmed HomeLinkாbuttons. FCC I.D. CV2V67690IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLENIf your vehicle is stolen, you should change thecodes of any non-rolling code device that hasbeen programmed into HomeLinkா. Consult theOwner’s Manual of each device or call the manu-facturer or dealer of those devices for additionalinformation.When your vehicle is recovered, you willneed to reprogram the HomeLinkா Univer-sal Transceiver with your new transmitterinformation.FCC Notice:This device complies with FCC rules part15. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions: (1) This device may notcause harmful interference and (2) This de-vice must accept any interference that maybe received, including interference thatmay cause undesired operation.This transmitter has been tested and com-plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.Changes or modifications not expressly ap- Instruments and controls 2-45 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 106. MEMO2-46 Instruments and controls
  • 107. 3 Pre-driving checks and adjustmentsKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Nissan vehicle immobilizer system (NVIS) Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Fuel filler cap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Tilting telescopic steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Automatic operation (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 How to use remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Automatic anti-glare inside mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 3-19Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Memory storage function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Entry/exit function (for automatic Secondary trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 transmission model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 System operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 108. KEYS from. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealer cess, these components will only recognize keys can duplicate it. coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys- tem (NVIS) during registration. Any key that is not NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER given to your dealer at the time of registration will SYSTEM (NVIS) KEYS no longer be able to start your vehicle. You can only drive your vehicle using the master Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which or valet keys which are registered to the NISSAN contains an electrical transponder, to come into Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your contact with salt water. This could affect system vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip in function. the key head. The master key can be used for all the locks. The valet key cannot be used for the glove box WPD0128 lock or rear seatback lock.1. Two master keys (black) with transpon- To protect belongings when you leave a key with der chip someone, give them the valet key only.2. Valet key (red) with transponder chip Never leave these keys in the vehicle.3. Key number plate4. Transponder chip Additional or replacement keys:A key number plate is supplied with your keys. If you still have a key, the key number is notRecord the key number and keep it in a safe place necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by cate your existing key. As many as five NVIS keysusing the key number. NISSAN does not record can be used with one vehicle. You should bring allkey numbers so it is very important to keep track NVIS keys that you have to your NISSAN dealerof your key number plate. for registration. This is because the registration process will erase the memory of all key codesA key number is only necessary when you have previously registered into the NISSAN Vehiclelost all keys and do not have one to duplicate Immobilizer System. After the registration pro-3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 109. DOORS WARNING Opening and closing windows● Always have the doors locked while The driver’s door key operation allows you to driving. Along with the use of seat belts, open and close windows equipped with auto- this provides greater safety in the event matic operation at the same time. of an accident by helping to prevent ● To open the windows, turn the driver’s door persons from being thrown from the key toward the rear of the vehicle for longer vehicle. This also helps keep children than 1 second after the door is unlocked. and others from unintentionally open- ing the doors, and will help keep out ● To close the windows, turn the driver’s door intruders. key to the front of the vehicle for longer than 1 second after the door is locked.● Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic. Windows stop when the key cylinder is released.● Do not leave children unattended inside LPD0181 the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac- Driver’s side tivate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in seri- LOCKING WITH KEY ous accidents. The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors at the same time. Turning the key toward the front ᭺ of the vehicle 1 locks all doors. Turning the key one time toward the rear ᭺ of the 2 vehicle unlocks that door. From that position, returning the key to neutral ᭺ (where the key can 3 only be removed and inserted) and turning it toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks all doors ᭺. 4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 110. key in the ignition and any door open, all doors will lock and unlock automatically. This helps to prevent the keys from being accidently locked inside the vehicle. LPD0182 LPD0183 Inside lock Door lock switchLOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK LOCKING WITH POWER DOORKNOB LOCK SWITCHTo lock the door without the key, move the inside To lock all the doors without a key, push the doorlock knob to the lock position ᭺, then close the 1 lock switch (driver or front passenger side), to thedoor. lock position ᭺. When locking the door this way, 1To unlock the door without the key, move the be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle.inside lock knob to the unlock position ᭺. 2 To unlock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (driver or front passenger side) to the unlock position ᭺. 2 Lockout protection When the power door lock switch (driver or front passenger) is moved to the lock position with the3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 111. REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn the ● Do not strike the keyfob sharply against interior light on, and activate the panic alarm by another object. using the keyfob from outside the vehicle. ● Do not place the keyfob for an extended Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle period in an area where temperatures before locking the doors. exceed 140°F (60°C). The keyfob can operate at a distance of approxi- If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec- mately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The effective ommends erasing the ID code of that key- distance depends upon the conditions around fob. This will prevent the keyfob from un- the vehicle. authorized use to unlock the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing proce- As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with one dure, please contact a NISSAN dealer. vehicle. For information concerning the purchase and use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSAN APD1010 dealer.CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK The keyfob will not function when:Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors ● the battery is dischargedfrom being opened accidentally, especially whensmall children are in the vehicle. ● the distance between the vehicle and the keyfob is over 33 ft (10 m)The child safety lock levers are located on theedge of the rear doors. The panic alarm will not activate when the key is in the ignition switch.When the lever is in the lock position, thedoor can be opened only from the outside. CAUTION Listed below are conditions or occur- rences which will damage the keyfob: ● Do not allow the keyfob to become wet. ● Do not drop the keyfob. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 112. twice and the horn beeps once as a re- minder that the doors are already locked. ● If a door is open and you push the button, the doors will lock but the horn will not beep and the hazard warning lights will not flash. The horn may or may not beep. Refer to “Person- alized settings menu” (vehicles without naviga- tion system) or “Vehicle electronic systems” (ve- hicles with navigation system) in the “Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio sys- tems” section later in this manual. WPD0132 WPD0133HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS Unlocking doorsENTRY SYSTEM Push the button on the keyfob once.Locking doors ● Only the driver’s door unlocks. 1. Close all windows ● The hazard indicator flashes once if all doors are completely closed with the ignition key in 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch. any position except the ON position. 3. Close the hood, trunk lid and all doors. ● The interior light turns on and the light timer 4. Push the button on the keyfob. All activates for 30 seconds when the interior the doors lock. The hazard warning lights light switch is in the center DOOR position flash twice and the horn beeps once to with the ignition key in any position except indicate all doors are locked. the ON position. ● When the button is pushed with all doors locked, the hazard warning lights flash3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 113. Push the button on the keyfob again within The door windows will open while pressing5 seconds. the button on the keyfob. ● All doors unlock. This opening windows function of the keyfob can be suspended using a CONSULT-II diagnostic ● The hazard indicator flashes once if all doors tool. Please contact a NISSAN dealer. are completely closed. The door windows cannot be closed byThe interior lights can be turned off without wait- using the keyfob.ing 30 seconds by inserting the key into theignition and turning to the ON or START position, Linking the keyfob to automatic drivelocking the doors with the keyfob or pushing the positioner memoryinterior light switch to the OFF position. If the vehicle is equipped with automatic driveAuto relock positioner, the keyfob can be linked to a memory setting.When the button on the keyfob is pushed, WPD0134 See “Automatic driver positioner” later in thisall doors will lock automatically within 1 minute section. Releasing the trunk lidunless one of the following operations is per-formed: Push the button on the keyfob for longer than 0.5 second. The trunk release button on the ● Any door is opened. keyfob will not operate when the ignition switch is ● A key is inserted into the ignition switch and in the ON position. the key is turned from OFF to ON. The trunk lid opens.Opening windows The trunk lid will open when using the key- fob even if the trunk lid release cancelThe keyfob allows you to open windows switch is turned to OFF. See “Trunk lid”equipped with automatic operation simulta- later in this section for cancel switch infor-neously. mation. ● To open the windows, press the but- ton on the keyfob for longer than 3 sec- onds after all doors are unlocked. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 114. Using the interior light The interior light can be turned off without waiting 30 seconds by inserting the key into the ignition, locking the doors with the keyfob or pushing the interior light button to OFF. WPD0135Using the panic alarmIf you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,you may activate the panic alarm to call attentionby pushing and holding the button on thekeyfob for longer than 0.5 second.The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25seconds.The panic alarm stops when: ● it has run for 25 seconds, or ● any button is pushed on the keyfob.3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 115. 5. Press the LOCK button, then the UNLOCK button two or three times to check the key- fob operation. If the battery is removed for any reason other than replacement, perform step 5. ● An improperly disposed battery can hurt the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal. ● The keyfob is water-resistant; how- ever, if it does get wet, immediately wipe completely dry. ● The operational range of the keyfob extends to approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. This range may vary with conditions. FCC Notice: Changes or modifications not expressly ap- proved by the manufacturer for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. WPD0136 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada.BATTERY REPLACEMENT ᭺ 3 Install a new battery with the “+” facing down. Operation is subject to the following twoReplace the battery in the keyfob as follows: conditions: (1) This device may not cause Recommended battery: Sanyo CR2025 or harmful interference, and (2) this device᭺1 Open the lid using a coin. equivalent. must accept any interference received, in-᭺2 Remove the battery. ᭺ 4 Close the lid securely. cluding interference that may cause undes- ired operation of the device. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 116. HOOD TRUNK LID LPD0184 LPD0185᭺1 Pull the hood lock release handle located WARNING Driver’s side below the driver side instrument panel. The OPENER OPERATION hood will spring up slightly. ● Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving. Fail- WARNING᭺2 Push the lever at the front of the hood to the ure to do so could cause the hood to fly side as illustrated with your fingertips and open and result in an accident. ● Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This raise the hood. could allow dangerous exhaust gases ● If you see steam or smoke coming from to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-When closing the hood, lower it slowly and make the engine compartment, to avoid injury haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”sure it locks into place. do not open the hood. section of this manual.3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 117. ● Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously in- jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children’s access to car keys.The trunk lid opener lever is located below thearmrest of the driver’s door trim panel. To openthe trunk lid, pull the opener lever out.To close the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk liddown securely. LPD0186 LPD0200 Cancel switch Rear seat without center console SECONDARY TRUNK LID RELEASE When the cancel switch located inside the glove box is OFF, the trunk lid cannot be opened with To open the trunk lid from the rear seat, fold down the trunk lid release switch. It can be opened with the rear seat or trunk compartment access lid (for the keyfob. models with rear console), and pull the rear seat trunk release handle ᭺. To close, push the trunk 1 lid down securely. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 118. To open the trunk from the inside, pull the illumi- nated release handle until the lock releases and push up on the trunk lid. The release handle is made of a material that glows in the dark after a brief exposure to ambient light. The handle is located inside the trunk compart- ment on the interior of the trunk lid. LPD0201 LPD0187 Rear seat with center console INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE WARNING Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children’s access to car keys. The interior trunk lid release mechanism provides a means of escape for children and adults in the event they become locked inside the trunk.3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 119. FUEL FILLER LID WARNING ● Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain condi- tions. You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled. Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling. ● Fuel may be under pressure. Turn the cap a third of a turn, and wait for any “hissing” sound to stop to prevent fuel from spraying out and possibly causing personal injury. Then remove the cap. LPD0188 LPD0189 ● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tankOPENER OPERATION FUEL FILLER CAP after the fuel pump nozzle shuts offThe fuel filler lid release is located on the driver’s The fuel filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the automatically. Continued refueling maydoor. To open the fuel filler lid, push the release. cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel cap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turnTo lock, close the fuel filler lid securely. spray and possibly a fire. the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are heard. ● Use only an original equipment type fuel filler cap as a replacement. It has a Put the fuel filler cap on the cap holder ᭺ while 1 built-in safety valve needed for proper refueling. operation of the fuel system and emis- sion control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury. It could also cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on. ● Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 120. TILTING TELESCOPIC STEERING COLUMN● Do not fill a portable fuel container in ● Tighten until the fuel filler cap clicks. the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity Failure to tighten the fuel filler cap can cause an explosion of flammable properly may cause the mal- liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the risk of serious function indicator lamp (MIL) to illumi- injury or death when filling portable fuel nate. If the lamp illuminates be- containers: cause the fuel filler cap is loose or – Always place the container on the missing, tighten or install the cap and ground when filling. continue to drive the vehicle. – Do not use electronic devices when The lamp should turn off after a filling. few driving trips. If the lamp – Keep the pump nozzle in contact does not turn off after a few driving with the container while you are fill- trips, have the vehicle inspected by a WPD0235 ing it. NISSAN dealer. AUTOMATIC OPERATION (if so – Use only approved portable fuel con- ● For additional information, see the tainers for flammable liquid. “Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)” in equipped) the “Instruments and Controls” section Tilt operation CAUTION earlier in this manual. Push the switch ᭺ to adjust the steering wheel 1● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, up or down ᭺ to the desired position. 2 flush it away with water to avoid paint damage. WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 121. Entry/Exit function Telescopic operationThe automatic drive positioner system will make Push the lock lever ᭺ down and adjust the 3the steering wheel move up automatically on steering wheel forward or backward ᭺ to the 4models equipped with automatic transmission. desired position.This lets the driver get into and out of the seat Pull the lock lever up firmly to lock the steeringmore easily. wheel in place.Telescopic operation WARNINGPush the switch ᭺ to adjust the steering wheel 1forward or backward ᭺ to the desired position. 3 Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer to you than is necessary for proper WARNING steering operation and comfort. The driv- er’s air bag inflates with great force. If youDo not adjust the steering wheel any are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting WPD0234closer to you than is necessary for proper sideways or out of position in any way, yousteering operation and comfort. The driv- MANUAL OPERATION are at greater risk of injury or death in aer’s air bag inflates with great force. If you crash. You may also receive serious orare unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting Tilt operation fatal injuries from the air bag if you are upsideways or out of position in any way, you against it when it inflates. Always sit back Pull the lock lever ᭺ forward and adjust the 1are at greater risk of injury or death in a against the seatback and as far away ascrash. You may also receive serious or steering wheel up or down ᭺ to the desired 2 position. practical from the steering wheel. Alwaysfatal injuries from the air bag if you are up use the seat belts.against it when it inflates. Always sit back Push the lock lever back to lock the steeringagainst the seatback and as far away as wheel in place.practical from the steering wheel. Alwaysuse the seat belts. WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 122. SUN VISORS ᭺ 1 To block glare from the front, swing down the main sun visor. ᭺ 2 To block glare from the side, remove the main sun visor from the center mount and swing the visor to the side. ᭺ 3 To block glare from the side and front, swing down the sub-sun visor. ᭺ 4 Slide the extension sun visor in or out as needed. CAUTION ● Do not store the sun visor before return- ing it to its original position. LPD0193 ● Store the main sun visor after storing VANITY MIRRORS the extension sun visor and sub-sun visor. To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor down and flip open the mirror cover. The vanity ● Do not pull the extension sun visor forc- mirror will illuminate when the mirror cover is edly downward. open. LPD02563-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 123. MIRRORS LPD0194 LPD0195 LPD0237 Without compass With compass OUTSIDE MIRRORSAUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE INSIDE For information on HomeLinkா Universal Trans- The outside mirror remote control will operateMIRROR ceiver operation, see the “HomeLinkா Universal only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ONThe inside mirror is designed so that it automati- Transceiver” in the “Instrument and controls” sec- position.cally changes reflection according to the intensity tion of this manual. Move the small switch ᭺ to select the right or left 1of the headlights of the vehicle following you. For information on the compass display (if so mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired positionWhen the inside MIRROR or AUTO switch is in equipped), see “Compass display” in the “Instru- using the large switch ᭺.2the ON position, the indicator light ᭺ will illumi- 1 ments and controls” section of this manual.nate and excessive glare from the headlights ofthe vehicle behind you will be reduced. When theswitch of the inside mirror is in the OFF position,the inside mirror will operate normally. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 124. WARNING● Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects.● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. MPA0008 LPD0196 Manual folding outside mirrors (if so Power folding outside mirrors (if so equipped) equipped) Push the mirrors backward to fold them. CAUTION Do not manually fold the power folding mirrors. Manually folding the mirrors can damage the mirrors. Press the switch to open or close the mirrors. Heated mirrors (if so equipped) The electric control type outside mirrors (if so equipped) can be heated to defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. Press the rear win- dow defogger switch to activate the heating3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 125. AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if so equipped)function. Press the switch again to deactivate, or The automatic drive positioner system has twothe heating function will automatically turn off features:after approximately 15 minutes. ● Memory storage function ● Entry/exit function (for automatic transmis- sion model only) LPD0197 MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION Two positions for the driver’s seat, steering col- umn, and outside mirrors can be stored in the automatic drive positioner memory. Follow these procedures to use the memory system. 1. For vehicles equipped with automatic trans- mission, set the shift selector lever to the P (Park) position. For vehicles equipped with manual trans- mission, place the shift lever in the N (Neu- tral) position and set the parking brake. 2. Turn the ignition ON. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 126. 3. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering column and 2. While the indicator light for the memory Selecting the memorized position outside mirrors to the desired positions by switch being set is illuminated for 5 sec- manually operating each adjusting switch. onds, press the button on the keyfob. 1. Set the automatic transmission selector le- For additional information, see “Seats” in the The indicator light will blink. After the indica- ver to the P (Park) position. “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemen- tor light goes off, the keyfob is linked to that 2. Turn the ignition ON. tal air bags” section and “Steering wheel” memory setting. 3. Push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for at and “Outside mirrors” earlier in this section. With the key removed from the ignition switch, least 1 second. During this step, do not turn the ignition to press the button on the keyfob. The driv- er’s seat and outside mirrors will move to the The driver’s seat, steering column and out- any positions other than ON. side mirrors will move to the memorized po- memorized position. 4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds, sition with the indicator light flashing, and push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for at Confirming memory storage then the light will stay on for approximately 5 least 1 second. ● Turn the ignition ON and push the SET seconds. The indicator light for the pushed memory switch. If the main memory has not been ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION (for stored, the indicator light will come on for switch will come on and stay on for approxi- approximately 0.5 seconds. When the automatic transmission model) mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch. memory has stored the position, the indica- This system is designed so that the driver’s seat After the indicator light goes off, the se- tor light will stay on for approximately 5 sec- and steering column will automatically move lected positions are stored in the selected onds. when the automatic transmission selector lever is memory (1 or 2). in the P (Park) position. This allows the driver to ● If the battery cable is disconnected, or if theIf memory is stored in the same memory switch, get into and out of the driver’s seat more easily. fuse blows, the memory will be canceled. Inthe previous memory will be deleted. (This feature is not available on manual transmis- such a case, reset the desired positions sion model.) using the following procedures.Linking a keyfob to a stored memory The driver’s seat will slide backward and theposition 1. Open and close the driver’s door more than steering wheel will move up: two times with the ignition key in the LOCKA keyfob can be linked to a stored memory posi- position. ● When the key is removed from the ignitiontion with the following procedure. switch. 2. Reset the desired position using the previ- 1. Follow the steps for storing a memory posi- ous procedure. ● When the driver’s door is opened with the tion. key turned to LOCK.3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 127. ● When the key is turned from ACC to LOCK ● when the adjusting switch for the driver’s with the driver’s door open while the auto- seat is turned on while the automatic drive matic transmission selector lever is in the P positioner is operating. (Park) position. ● when the memory switch (1 or 2) is notThe driver’s seat and steering wheel will return to pushed for at least 1 second.the previous position: ● when the seat has been already moved to ● When the key is inserted into the ignition the memorized position. switch. ● when no seat position is stored in the ● When the driver’s door is closed with the key memory switch. turned to LOCK. The automatic drive positioner system can be adjusted and canceled. See “Vehicle electronic ● When the key is turned from ACC to ON systems” in the “Display screen, heater, air con- while the automatic transmission selector ditioner and audio systems” section of this lever is in the P (Park) position. manual.The entry/exit feature can be adjusted or can-celed. See “Vehicle electronic systems” in the“Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audiosystems” section of this manual.SYSTEM OPERATIONThe automatic drive positioner system will notwork or will stop operating under the followingconditions: ● when the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7 km/h). ● when any two or more of the memory switches are simultaneously pushed while the automatic drive positioner is operating. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 128. MEMO3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
  • 129. 4 Display screen, heater, air conditionerand audio systemsControl panel buttons — without navigation system. . . . 4-2 Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Names of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Heater and air conditioner (automatic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 How to use JOYSTICK and “ENTER” button . . . . . . . 4-3 Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 How to use “PREV” button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 How to use “TRIP” button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 How to use “FUEL ECON” button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 How to use “E/M” button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 How to use (maintenance) button . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 How to use the “SETTING” button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Satellite radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19Control panel buttons — with navigation system. . . . . . . 4-7 Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 Names of the components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 FM-AM-SAT radio with cassette player and How to use joystick and “ENTER” button . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 compact disc (CD) player (Type A)/CD How to use “PREV” button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 changer (Type B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 Setting up the start-up screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 How to use the “TRIP” button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Steering wheel switch for audio control . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 How to use the “SETTING” button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 130. CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM WARNING● Positioning of the heating or air condi- tioning controls and display controls should not be done while driving in or- der that full attention may be given to the driving operation.● Do not disassemble or modify this sys- tem. If you do, it may result in accidents, fire, or electrical shock.● Do not use this system if you notice any abnormality, such as a frozen screen or lack of sound. Continued use of the system may result in accident, fire or electric shock.● In case you notice any foreign object in the system hardware, spill liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell coming from it, stop using the system immediately and contact your nearest NISSAN dealer. Ignoring such conditions may lead to accidents, fire or electrical shock. LHA0249 When you use this system, make sure the engine Reference symbols: is running. “ENTER” button — This is a button on the con- If you use the system with the engine not trol panel. running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long time, it will use up all the battery power, and the engine will not start.4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 131. “Display” key — This is a select key on the HOW TO USE JOYSTICK ANDscreen. By selecting this key you can proceed to “ENTER” BUTTONthe next function. Choose an item on the display using the joystick.NAMES OF COMPONENTS Push the “ENTER” button only when the use of it 1. brightness control button (P. 4-6) is instructed on the display. 2. PREV (previous) button (P. 4-3) HOW TO USE “PREV” BUTTON 3. Joystick and ENTER push button (P. 4-3) Finish setup: 4. SETTING button (P. 4-5) If you touch “PREV” button after the setup is completed, the setup will start over. 5. (maintenance) button (P. 4-5) 6. TRIP drive computer button (P. 4-3) 7. FUEL ECON button (P. 4-4) LHA0252 8. TRIP RESET button (P. 4-3) HOW TO USE “TRIP” BUTTON 9. E/M (English/metric) button (P. 4-4) When the “TRIP” button is pushed, the following modes will display on the screen.10. Clock adjust button (hours) (P. 4-4) TRIP 1 (TIME, DIST, AVG) → TRIP 2 (TIME, DIST,11. Clock adjust button (minutes) (P. 4-4) AVG) → OFFTo turn off the screen, push the button for TRIP 1 and TRIP 2 record journey time (TIME —more than approximately 1.5 seconds. The max 99 hours 59 minutes), trip odometer (DISTscreen will change to “CONFIRM DISPLAY OFF — mile or km) and average speed (AVG — MPHYES or NO”. or km/h). To reset the TRIP 1 or TRIP 2, push the “TRIP” button or the “TRIP RESET” button for more than approximately 1.5 seconds. Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-3 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 132. The display is updated every 30 seconds. For CLOCK approximately the first 30 seconds and 1/3 miles (500 m) after a reset or connecting the battery The digital clock displays time when the ignition cables, the display will show (----). key is in ACC or ON. Distance to empty (dte — mile or km) If the power supply is disconnected, the clock will not indicate the correct time. The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you Readjust the time. with an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling. The dte is constantly be- Adjusting the time ing calculated based on the amount of fuel in the To adjust the time, push the “H” or “M” button fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption. for more than approximately 1.5 seconds. The The display is updated every 30 seconds. time indicator will flash. When the fuel level is low, the dte display will Touch the “H” button to adjust the hour. LHA0253 change to (*). Touch the “M” button to adjust the minute.HOW TO USE “FUEL ECON” To finish the adjusting, press the “PREV” button NOTE:BUTTON or the screen will return to normal after 10 sec- ● If the amount of fuel added while the ignition onds.The average fuel consumption (MPG or L/100 switch is OFF is small, the display just beforekm) and the distance to empty (dte — mi or km) the ignition switch is turned OFF may con- HOW TO USE “E/M” BUTTONwill appear on the screen when the “FUEL tinue to be displayed.ECON” button is pushed. You can change the unit as follows using the ● When driving uphill or rounding curves, the “E/M” (English/Metric) button.Average fuel consumption (MPG or fuel in the tank shifts, which may momentarily Unit: US — mile, °F, MPGL/100 km) change the display. Metric — km, °C, L/100 kmThe average fuel consumption mode shows theaverage fuel consumption since the last reset.Resetting is done by pressing the “TRIP RE-SET” or “FUEL ECON” button for more thanapproximately 1.5 seconds.4-4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 133. HOW TO USE THE “SETTING” Beep set BUTTON If the beep set “OFF” key is selected using the Pushing the “SETTING” button will change the joystick, the beep sound will not operate (except settings menu as follows: some caution beep sounds). DISPLAY ON/OFF Service alert LANGUAGE If the service alert “ON” key is selected, the information will be displayed when the engine oil BEEP SET and the tire rotation periods reach the preset SERVICE ALERT driving distance. PERSONALIZED SETTINGS MENU Personalized settings menu LHA0250 Display ON/OFF You can set the following electronic systems operating conditions using the joystick.HOW TO USE (maintenance) To turn off the screen, select the OFF key of the “Display ON/OFF” using the joystick. Slide back DR (driver’s) seat on exit:BUTTON The screen will change to “CONFIRM DISPLAY The driver’s seat automatically moves back andPushing the button will change the main- returns to the original position for exceptional OFF YES or NO”.tenance menu as follows: ease of exit and entry.ENGINE OIL → TIRE ROTATION If YES key is selected using the joystick, the screen will turn off after a 2 beep sound and Remote unlock door logic:To reset the driving distance, push the approximately 1 second. This option allows you to select which doors willbutton or “TRIP RESET” button for more than unlock first during an unlocking operation:approximately 1.5 seconds. To turn on the screen, push the “SETTING” , trip control, air conditioner (except rear window de- Only the driver’s door ←→ All the doorsTo set the distance, push the joystick to left or fogger button) or audio button.right. Horn chirp with remote: Language This option allows you to select the horn chirp The language can be changed to “English” or mode that occurs when the LOCK or UNLOCK “Français” using the joystick. button on the keyfob is pressed. Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-5 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 134. NOTE: Auto headlamp off delay: ● Do not disassemble or modify this sys-If you change the horn beep or the lamp This option allows you to select the length of time tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,flash feature with the keyfob, the mode will before the autolights turn off. fire, or electrical shock.not be changed with the display. Use the Speed sensing wiper interval: ● Do not use this system if you notice anykeyfob to return to the previous mode and abnormality, such as a frozen screen orre-enable the display control. This option allows you to turn on or turn off the lack of sound. Continued use of the driving speed dependent intermittent wiper func- system may result in accident, fire orLamps flash with remote: tion. electric shock.This option allows you to select the hazard indi- Confirm reset settings: ● In case you notice any foreign object incator flash mode that occurs when the LOCK or the system hardware, spill liquid on it,UNLOCK button on the keyfob is pressed. This option allows you to reset all options to their default settings. or notice smoke or smell coming from it, stop using the system immediatelyNOTE: BUTTON and contact your nearest NISSANIf you change the horn beep or the lamp dealer. Ignoring such conditions may To change the display brightness, push lead to accidents, fire or electricalflash feature with the keyfob, the mode will the button. Pushing the button again willnot be changed with the display. Use the shock. change the display to DAY or NIGHT display.keyfob to return to the previous mode and Then, adjust the brightness moving the joystickre-enable the display control. right or left.Auto relock time: If no operation is done within 10 seconds, or if the “PREV” button is pushed, the display will returnThis option allows you to set the length of time to the previous display.before the doors lock with the auto re-lock func-tion. WARNINGAuto headlamp sensitivity: ● Positioning of the heating or air condi-This option allows you to set the sensitivity of the tioning controls and display controlsautolights. should not be done while driving in or- der that full attention may be given to the driving operation.4-6 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 135. CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — WITHNAVIGATION SYSTEM “Display” key — This is a select key on the screen. By selecting this key you can proceed to the next function. NAMES OF THE COMPONENTS 1. brightness control button (P. 4-14) 2. PREV (previous) button (P. 4-8) 3. Joystick and ENTER push button (P. 4-8) 4. SETTING button (P. 4-10) 5. TRIP drive computer button (P. 4-8) 6. DEST button* 7. MAP button* 8. Zoom out button* 9. Zoom in button* 10. ROUTE button* 11. GUIDE VOICE button* *For Navigation system control buttons, refer to LHA0254 the separate Navigation System Owner’s Reference symbols: Manual.When you use this system, make sure the engineis running. “ENTER” button — This is a button on the con-If you use the system with the engine not trol panel.running (ignition ON or ACC) for a longtime, it will use up all the battery power,and the engine will not start. Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-7 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 136. HOW TO USE JOYSTICK AND If you do not touch the button or screen key for“ENTER” BUTTON more than 1 minute on the TRIP, SETTING or START-UP screen, the screen will change toChoose an item on the display using the joystick TRIP screen automatically.and push the “ENTER” button for operation. To proceed to the next step, refer to the separateHOW TO USE “PREV” BUTTON Navigation System Owner’s Manual.This button has two functions. ● Go back to the previous display (cancel).If you touch “PREV” button during setup, thesetup will be canceled and/or the display willreturn to the previous screen. ● Finish setup. LHA0263If you touch this button after the setup is com- HOW TO USE THE “TRIP” BUTTONpleted, the setup will start over, and the displaywill return to the climate control or audio mode When the “TRIP” button is pushed, the followingand Navigation screen. modes will display on the screen.SETTING UP THE START-UP Warning message (if there are any) → TRIP 1 (Elapsed Time, Driving Distance, AverageSCREEN Speed) → TRIP 2 → FUEL ECONOMY (AverageWhen you turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, the Fuel Economy, Distance to Empty) → MAINTE-SYSTEM START-UP warning is displayed on the NANCE (Engine Oil, Tire Rotation) → OFF.screen. Read the warning and select the “IAGREE” (English) or “ENTER” (Français) keythen push the “ENTER” button.If you do not push the “ENTER” button, theNavigation system will not proceed to the nextstep display.4-8 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 137. LHA0264 LHA0265 LHA0266Trip 1, trip 2 and fuel economy items Maintenance items To set the maintenance interval, select the “Maintenance Schedule” key by using the joy-To reset the TRIP 1, TRIP 2 and FUEL You can set the engine oil and the tire rotation stick and push the joystick to right or left.ECONOMY, select the “RESET” key using the interval.joystick and push the “ENTER” button or push To reset the maintenance interval, select the “Re- To display the setting of the maintenance interval, set” key using the joystick and push the “EN-the “TRIP” button for more than approximately select the “Engine Oil” or “Tire Rotation” key TER” button.1.5 seconds. using the joystick and push the “ENTER” button. To display the MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automatically when set trip distance is reached, select the “Display Maintenance Notifica- tion” key and push the “ENTER” button. Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-9 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 138. LHA0267 LHA0268 LHA0259 HOW TO USE THE “SETTING” Vehicle electronic systems BUTTON The VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS screen The SETTING screen will appear when the will appear when selecting the “Vehicle Elec- “SETTING” button is pushed. tronic Systems” key with the joystick and push- ing the “ENTER” button. Display settings To set the various electronic systems operating The DISPLAY SETTINGS screen will appear af- conditions, select the applicable item using the ter pushing the “SETTING” button, selecting joystick, and push the “ENTER” button. The “Display” key and pushing the “ENTER” but- indicator light, box at left of selected item, alter- ton. nately turns on and off each time the “ENTER” button is pressed. Indicator light is illuminated — ON Indicator light is not illuminated — OFF4-10 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 139. NOTE: If you change the horn beep or the lamp flash feature with the keyfob, the mode will not be changed with the display. Use the keyfob to return to the previous mode and re-enable the display control. Keyless remote response — lights: This key allows you to change the hazard indica- tor flash mode that occurs when pressing the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the keyfob. NOTE: LHA0260 LHA0261 If you change the horn beep or the lampAdjust driver seat when exiting vehicle (au- Remote unlock driver’s door first: flash feature with the keyfob, the mode willtomatic transmission only): not be changed with the display. Use the This option allows you to select which doors willWith this option ON, the driver’s seat automati- unlock first during an unlocking operation: keyfob to return to the previous mode andcally moves back and returns to the original po- re-enable the display control.sition for ease of exit and entry. Only the driver’s door ←→ All the doors Auto re-lock time:Lift steering column when exiting vehicle Keyless remote response — horn: This key allows you to set the length of time(automatic transmission only): This key allows you to change the horn chirp before doors auto re-lock.With this option ON, the steering column auto- mode that occurs when pressing the LOCK or Sensitivity of automatic headlights:matically tilts up and returns to the original posi- UNLOCK button on the keyfob.tion for ease of exit and entry. This key allows you to set the sensitivity of the automatic headlights: ● Lower- less sensitive, automatic headlights will take longer to come on when the head- light sensor senses less ambient light. Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-11 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 140. ● Higher- more sensitive, automatic head- lights will come on quicker when the head- light sensor senses less ambient light.Automatic headlights off delay:This key allows you to set the length of timebefore the automatic headlights turn off afterexiting the vehicle.Speed dependent wiper:This key allows you to turn on or turn off thedriving speed dependent intermittent wiper func-tion.Return all settings to default: LHA0262 LHA0270When this key is selected and turned on usingthe “ENTER” button, all settings made by VE- System settings ClockHICLE ELECTRONICS will return to the default Language/Unit Adjusting the time:settings. Select the “Hours” or “Minutes” key and move The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear when selecting the “Language/Unit” key and push- the joystick to the right or left to adjust the time. ing the “ENTER” button. The time will change step by step. Language: English or French After completion of the setting, press the Unit: US — mile, °F, MPG “PREV” button. Metric — km, °C, L/100 km You can select the language and unit using the joystick and “ENTER” button.4-12 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 141. LHA0271 LHA0272 LHA0273Setting daylight savings time: Adjusting the time to the GPS: Selecting the time zone:Use the “Daylight Saving Time” key to adjust Select the “Auto Adjust” key. 1. Select the “Select Time Zone” key.the clock to daylight savings time. The time will be reset to the GPS time. The [TIME ZONE] screen will appear.ON: The displayed time advances by 1 hour.OFF: The current time is displayed. Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-13 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 142. VENTILATORS The GPS time (manual time) corresponding to the selected zone will be displayed. Pacific zone has been set as the initial (default) setting. Beep setting With this option ON, a beep will sound if any audio button is pushed. BUTTON To change the display brightness, push the button. Pushing the button again will change the display to DAY or NIGHT display. Then, adjust the brightness moving the joystick right or left. LHA0274 LHA0255 If no operation is done within 10 seconds, or if the Center 2. Select one of the following zones depending “PREV” button is pushed, the display will return on the current location. to the previous display. Adjust air flow direction by moving the ventilator slides. ● Pacific zone Open or close the ventilators by using the dial. ● Mountain zone Move the dial toward the hollow circle to open the ● Central zone ventilators or toward the solid circle to close them. ● Eastern zone ● Atlantic zone ● Newfoundland zoneAfter selection, the [CLOCK SETTINGS] screenwill appear.4-14 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 143. LHA0257 LHA0258Side Rear Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-15 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 144. HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(automatic) ● Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up. ● Positioning of the heater and/or air conditioner controls should not be done while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Start the engine and operate the controls to activate the air conditioner. AUTOMATIC OPERATION LHA0247 Cooling and/or dehumidified heating1. Temperature control button (driver side) 12. OFF button for climate control (AUTO)2. AUTO climate control ON button system This mode may be used all year round as the3. (fresh air) button system automatically works to keep a constant WARNING4. (front defroster) button temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed5. A/C (air conditioner) ON/OFF button ● The air conditioner cooling function op- are also controlled automatically.6. (fan speed control) button erates only when the engine is running. 1. Push the AUTO button on. (AUTO will be7. MODE (manual air flow control) button ● Do not leave children, impaired adults, displayed.)8. Temperature control button (passenger or pets alone in your vehicle. On hot, side) sunny days, temperatures in a closed 2. Push the temperature control button up or9. DUAL (passenger side tempera- vehicle could quickly become high down to set the desired temperature. enough to cause severe or possibly fa- ture control) ON/OFF button ● Adjust the temperature display to about 75° tal injuries to people or animals.10. Rear window defroster switch F (24° C) for normal operation.11. Air recirculation button ● The temperature of the passenger compart- ment will be maintained automatically. Air4-16 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 145. flow distribution and fan speed are also con- Dehumidified defrosting or defogging MANUAL OPERATION trolled automatically. Fan speed control 1. Push the defroster button on. The in- 3. You can individually set driver and front pas- dicator light on the button will come on. Push the fan control button to manually senger side temperature using each tem- control the fan speed. 2. Push the temperature control button up or perature control button. When the DUAL down to set the desired temperature. Push the AUTO button to return to automatic button or passenger side temperature but- ton is pushed, the DUAL indicator will come ● To quickly remove ice from the outside of the control of the fan speed. on. To turn off the passenger side tempera- windows, set the fan speed to maximum. ture control, push the DUAL button. Air recirculation ● As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, push the AUTO button to return to the Push the air recirculation button to recirculateHeating (A/C OFF) interior air inside the vehicle. The indicator light automatic mode.The air conditioner does not activate. When you on the button will come on. ● When the front defroster button is pushed,need to heat only, use this mode. The air recirculation cannot be activated when the air conditioner will automatically be 1. Push the A/C button. (A/C OFF will be dis- turned on at outside temperatures above the air conditioner is in the front defrosting mode. played and A/C indicator will turn off.) 23°F (Ϫ5°C). The air conditioning system will continue to operate until the fan control Fresh air 2. Push the temperature control button up or dial is turned to OFF or the vehicle is shut off, Push the button to draw outside air into the down to set the desired temperature. even if the air flow control button is used to passenger compartment. The indicator light on ● The temperature of the passenger compart- select a position other than position. the button will come on. ment will be maintained automatically. Air This dehumidifies the air which helps defog flow distribution and fan speed are also con- the windshield. The air recirculate mode au- Automatic intake air control tomatically turns off, allowing outside air to trolled automatically. In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be con- be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging perfor- trolled automatically. To manually control the in- ● Do not set the temperature lower than the mance. take air, push the air recirculate or fresh air but- outside air temperature. Otherwise the sys- ton. To return to the automatic control mode, tem may not work properly. push the same button for about 2 seconds. The ● Not recommended if windows fog up. indicator lights (both air recirculate and fresh air buttons) will flash twice, and then the intake air will be controlled automatically. Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-17 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 146. SERVICING AIR CONDITIONERAir flow control The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve- hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed withPushing the MODE (manual air flow control) but- the environment in mind.ton selects the air outlet to: This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s — Air flows from center and side ozone layer. ventilators. — Air flows from center and side Special charging equipment and lubricant is re- quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi- ventilators and foot outlets. tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants — Air flows mainly from foot outlets. will cause severe damage to your air conditioner — Air flows from defroster outlets system. See “Air conditioner system refrigerant and foot outlets. and lubricant recommendations” in the “Techni-To turn system off cal and consumer information” section of this manual.Push the OFF button. WHA0209 A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ-OPERATING TIPS The sunload sensor, located on the top passen- mentally friendly” air conditioning system. ger side of the instrument panel, helps the system ● When the engine coolant temperature and maintain a constant temperature. Do not put any- WARNING outside air temperature are low, the air flow thing on or around this sensor. from the foot outlets may not operate for a The air conditioner system contains re- maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is frigerant under high pressure. To avoid not a malfunction. After the coolant tempera- personal injury, any air conditioner ser- ture warms up, air flow from the foot outlets vice should be done only by an experi- will operate normally. enced technician with proper equipment.4-18 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 147. AUDIO SYSTEMRADIO Reception conditions will constantly change be- Multipath reception: Because of the reflective cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain, characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflectedTurn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position signal distance and interference from other ve- signals reach the receiver at the same time. Theand press the PWR (power)/VOL (volume) knob hicles can work against ideal reception. De- signals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio with scribed below are some of the factors that can mentary flutter or loss of sound.the engine not running, the key should be turned affect your radio reception.to the ACC position. AM RADIO RECEPTION FM RADIO RECEPTIONRadio reception is affected by station signal AM signals, because of their low frequency, canstrength, distance from radio transmitter, build- Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 - 30 bend around objects and skip along the ground.ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ- miles (40 - 48 km), with monaural (single chan- In addition, the signals can be bounced off theences. Intermittent changes in reception quality nel) FM having slightly more range than stereo ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because ofnormally are caused by these external influences. FM. External influences may sometimes interfere these characteristics, AM signals are also sub- with FM station reception even if the FM station is ject to interference as they travel from transmitterUsing a cellular phone in or near the ve- within 25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FM to receiver.hicle may influence radio reception quality. signal is directly related to the distance between Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passingRadio reception the transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a through freeway underpasses or in areas with line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the sameYour NISSAN radio system is equipped with many tall buildings. It can also occur for several characteristics as light. For example they willstate-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra- seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in reflect off objects.dio reception. These circuits are designed to areas where no obstacles exist.extend reception range, and to enhance the qual- Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electricality of that reception. a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights. and/or drift.However there are some general characteristics Static and flutter: During signal interference from SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTIONof both FM and AM radio signals that can affectradio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even buildings, large hills or due to antenna position When the satellite radio is first installed or thewhen the finest equipment is used. These char- (usually in conjunction with increased distance battery has been replaced, the satellite radio mayacteristics are completely normal in a given re- from the station transmitter) static or flutter can not work properly. This is not a malfunction. Waitception area, and do not indicate any malfunction be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the more than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON andin your NISSAN radio system. treble control to reduce treble response. Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-19 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 148. the vehicle outside of any metal or large building ● Cassette tapes should be removedfor satellite radio to receive all of the necessary from the player when not in use. Storedata. cassettes in their protective cases andNo satellite radio reception is available and “NO away from direct sunlight, heat, dust,SAT” is displayed when the SAT button is moisture and magnetic sources.pressed unless optional satellite receiver and ● Direct sunlight can cause the cassetteantenna are installed (late availability only/retrofit to become deformed. The use of de-unavailable without factory satellite radio pre- formed cassettes may cause the cas-wiring), and an XMா or SIRIUS™ satellite radio sette to jam in the player.service subscription is active. ● Do not use cassettes with labels whichSatellite radio performance may be affected if are peeling and loose. If used, the labelcargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radiosignal. could jam in the player.If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite ● If a cassette has loose tape, insert aantenna. pencil through one of the cassette hubs and rewind the tape firmly around the hubs. Loose tape may cause tape jamming and wavering sound quality. ● Over a period of time, the playback head, capstan and pinch roller may col- lect a tape coating residue as the tape LHA0099 is played. This residue accumulation can cause weak or wavering sound, AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS and should be removed periodically Cassette player with a head cleaning tape. If the resi- due is not removed periodically, the ● To maintain good quality sound, NISSAN player may need to be disassembled recommends using cassette tapes of 60 for cleaning. minutes or shorter in length.4-20 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 149. Compact disc (CD) player ● Do not use the following CDs as they may cause the CD player to malfunc- ● Only use high quality 4.7 inches (12 cm) tion: round discs that have the “COMPACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc ● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter or packaging. ● CDs that are not round ● During cold weather or rainy days, the ● CDs with a paper label player may malfunction due to the hu- midity. If this occurs, remove the CD ● CDs that are warped, scratched, or and dehumidify or ventilate the player have abnormal edges completely. ● The player may skip while driving on rough roads. ● The CD player sometimes cannot func- tion when the compartment tempera- ture is extremely high. Decrease the temperature before use. ● Do not expose the CD to direct sun- light. ● CDs that are in poor condition or are dirty, scratched or covered with finger- prints may not work properly. ● The following CDs may not work prop- erly: ● Copy control compact discs (CCCD) ● Recordable compact discs (CD-R) ● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW) Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-21 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 150. 10. TAPE play/side select button 11. SAT (satellite) radio select button* 12. Tuning and AUDIO control knob (BASS, TREBLE, FADE and BAL- ANCE) 13. CD insert slot 14. CD eject button 15. Cassette tape insert slot 16. Cassette tape eject button *No satellite radio reception is available and “NO SAT” is displayed when the SAT button is pressed unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are in- stalled (late availability only/retrofit un- available without factory satellite radio pre-wiring), and an XMா or SIRIUS™ satellite radio service subscription is active. LHA0304 Type A1. SEEK/APS REW, APS FF/TRACK 5. ON·OFF/VOLUME control knob change button 6. PRESET A-B-C select button2. TUNE/REW FF button 7. Station select buttons (1 - 6)3. PAUSE/MUTE button 8. FM-AM band select button4. PROG/RPT button 9. CD play button4-22 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 151. 10. TAPE play/side select button 11. SAT (satellite) radio select button* 12. Tuning and AUDIO control knob (BASS, TREBLE, FADE and BALANCE, SSV and NR (Dolby)) 13. CD load button 14. CD insert slot 15. CD eject button 16. Cassette tape insert slot 17. Cassette tape eject button *No satellite radio reception is available and “NO SAT” is displayed when the SAT button is pressed unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are in- stalled (late availability only/retrofit un- available without factory satellite radio pre-wiring), and an XMா or SIRIUS™ satellite radio service subscription is active. LHA0248 FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH Type B CASSETTE PLAYER AND1. SEEK/APS REW, APS FF/TRACK 5. ON·OFF/VOLUME control knob COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER change button 6. PRESET A-B-C select button (Type A)/CD CHANGER (Type B)2. TUNE/REW FF button 7. Station and CD select buttons (1 - 6)3. PAUSE/MUTE button 8. FM-AM band select button No satellite radio reception is available and “NO SAT” is displayed when the SAT button is4. PROG/RPT button 9. CD play button pressed unless optional satellite receiver and Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-23 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 152. antenna are installed (late availability only/retrofit AUDIO knob (BASS, TREBLE, FADE, BAL- Once you have adjusted the sound quality to theunavailable without factory satellite radio pre- ANCE, (SSV and NR (Dolby) — Type B desired level, press the AUDIO knob repeatedlywiring), and an XMா or SIRIUS™ satellite radio only)): until the radio, cassette tape or CD display reap-service subscription is active. pears. Otherwise, the radio, cassette tape or CD Press the AUDIO knob to change the mode as display will automatically reappear after about 10Audio main operation follows: seconds.The tape deck employs a permalloy head which BASS → TREBLE → FADE → BALANCE → Display CD text:allows for improved reproduction of high fre- SSV (Type B only) → NR (when cassette playing,quency ranges. Noise is also greatly reduced by Type B only) To change the text displayed while playing a CD,the combined use of the Dolby NR (Noise Re- To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, press press the AUDIO knob until “Display Mode” ap-duction) system. The auto loudness circuit en- the AUDIO knob until the desired mode appears pears.hances the low frequency range automatically in in the display. Turn the Tuning knob to adjust Turn the Tuning knob within 2 seconds. The textboth radio reception and tape and CD playback. Bass and Treble to the desired level. You can also will change as follows: use the Tuning knob to adjust Fader and BalanceON·OFF/Volume control: modes. Fader adjusts the sound level between Track number ←→ Track title ←→ Disc title ←→Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts Track numberpush the ON·OFF/Volume control knob while the the sound between the right and left speakers. Display satellite radio text:system is off to call up the mode (radio, tape or To change the SSV mode (Type B only) to OFF,CD) which was playing immediately before the LOW, MID or HIGH, turn the Tuning knob to right To change the text displayed while listening tosystem was turned off. or left. satellite radio, press the AUDIO knob until “Dis- play Mode” appears.To turn the system off, press the ON·OFF/Volume To change the NR (Dolby) mode to OFF or ON,control knob. turn the Tuning knob to right or left while cassette Turn the Tuning knob within 2 seconds. The text tape is playing. When Dolby is ON, the will change as follows:Turn the ON·OFF/Volume control knob to adjust mark is displayed. Channel number ←→ Channel name ←→ Artistthe volume. Dolby noise reduction manufactured under li- ←→ Title ←→ Channel numberThis vehicle has speed sensitive control volume cense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-(SSV) for audio (type B only) . The audio volume Pause/mute button: ration. Dolby NR and the double-D symbolchanges as the driving speed changes. are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing To mute or pause the audio sound, push the Corporation. PAUSE/MUTE button.4-24 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 153. To release the mute or pause, push the button The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM the or button is not pushed within 5again. stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next station. signal is weak, the radio will automatically changeFM/AM/SAT radio operation from stereo to monaural reception. Station memory operations:FM/AM/SAT radio select: TUNE (Tuning): 18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT radio to the A, B and C preset button.Pushing the FM-AM or SAT radio select button WARNING 1. Choose preset channel A, B or C using thewill change the band as follows: preset select button. The radio should not be tuned while driv-AM ←→ FM or SAT (Satellite) 2. Tune to the desired station using manual, ing so full attention may be given to ve-When FM-AM or SAT radio select button is hicle operation. SEEk or SCAN tuning. Push and hold any ofpushed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or the desired station memory buttons (1 - 6) To manually tune the radio, push the TUNE button until a beep sound is heard. (The radio mutesON, the radio will come on at the station last ( or ) or turn the tuning knob to right when the select button is pushed.)played. or left. 3. The channel indicator will then come on andThe last station played will also come on when To move quickly through the channels, hold either the sound will resume. Memorizing is nowthe ON·OFF/Volume control knob is depressed the or button down for more than complete.to ON. 1.5 seconds. 4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner.No satellite radio reception is available and “NO SEEK tuning:SAT” is displayed when the SAT button is If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fusepressed unless optional satellite receiver and Push the SEEK button ( or ) for less blows, the radio memory will be canceled. In thatantenna are installed (late availability only/retrofit than 1.5 seconds to tune from high to low or low case, reset the desired stations. to high frequencies and stop at the next broad-unavailable without factory satellite radio pre- Radio data system (RDS) (if so equipped): casting station.wiring), and an XMா or SIRIUS™ satellite radio RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a dataservice subscription is active. SCAN tuning: information service transmitted by some radioIf a compact disc or tape is playing when the Push the or button for more than stations on the FM band (not AM band) and/orFM-AM or SAT radio select button is pushed, the 1.5 seconds to stop at each broadcasting station SAT radio encoded within a regular radio broad-compact disc or tape will automatically be turned for 5 seconds. Pushing the button again during cast. Currently, most RDS stations are in largeoff and the last radio station played will come on. this 5 seconds period will stop SCAN tuning and cities, but many stations are now considering the radio will remain tuned to that station. If broadcasting RDS data. Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-25 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 154. RDS can display: SEEK tuning: ● Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”. 3. After selecting a program type, push the ● Station name, such as “The Groove”. SEEK button ( or ) for less than 1.5 seconds within 10 seconds. Tuning to ● Music or programming type such as “Clas- the PTY station will start. If you do not push sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”. the SEEK button within the 10 second pe- ● Traffic reports about delays or construction. riod, the PTY mode will be canceled.If the station broadcasts RDS information, the SCAN tuning:RDS icon is displayed. 4. Push the or button for moreProgram type (PTY): than 1.5 seconds to scan the PTY name stations and stop at each broadcasting sta-PTY can be used to search for a certain program tion for 5 seconds. Pushing the button againtype. Certain areas have a limited number of during this 5 second period will stop SCANstations that transmit RDS. Many stations trans-mit call letters and frequencies only. tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station. If the or button is notSearching or scanning by program type may yield pushed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuninga limited number of selections. moves to the next station.When PROG/RPT button is pressed for more Cassette tape player operationthan 1.5 seconds during FM or SAT mode, thePTY name of the current tuned station is dis- Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, then lightlyplayed. During this time if the PTY data code is LHA0275 insert the cassette tape into the tape door. Thezero or the data is unreadable, the display will cassette tape will be automatically pulled into theshow NONE. 2. Press the TUNE button ( or ) to player. chose a specific program type. Refer to theTo change the PTY: illustration. The radio or CD will turn off (if it is on) and the 1. Press the PROG/RPT button. The display will show “SEEK, SCAN?” cassette tape will begin to play.4-26 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 155. REW or FF function, press the (rewind) a program or there is no interval between pro- WARNING or (fast forward) again, or press the TAPE grams, the system may not stop in the desired orDo not force the cassette tape into the button. expected location.tape door. This could damage the player. APS (Automatic Program REPEAT (RPT):If the system is turned off by pushing the Search) REW, APS FF: When the PROG/RPT play button is pushedON·OFF/VOL control knob with the cassette When the (APS REW) button is pushed while the tape is played, the tape program play istape still in the player, the tape will resume playing once for less than 1.5 seconds while a tape is repeated. To stop the repeat play, push thewhen the system is turned back on. playing, the program being played will start over PROG/RPT play button again.PLAY: from the beginning. Push the (APS REW) Metal or chrome tape usage: button several times to skip back several selec- ● When the TAPE button is pushed with the tions. The tape will go back the number of times The cassette player will be automatically set to system turned off and a tape already loaded, the button is pushed. high performance play when playing a metal or the system will come on and the tape will chrome cassette tape. play. When the (APS FF) button is pushed for less than 1.5 seconds while a tape is playing, the TAPE EJECT: ● When the TAPE button is pushed with either next program will start to play from the beginning. the radio or compact disc turned on and a When button is pushed with a tape Push the (APS FF) button several times to tape already loaded, the compact disc or the loaded, the tape will be ejected. radio will automatically be turned off and the skip through programs. The tape will advance the tape will play. number of times the button is pushed (up to 9 When a tape is ejected while it is being played, programs). Either the REW or FF symbol flashes the system will be turned off. ● When the TAPE button is pushed with a on the display window while searching for the TAPE playing, the tape will play the program selection. Compact disc (CD) player operation recorded on the reverse side. (Type A) When pushing the (APS REW) or REW (Rewind), FF (Fast (APS FF) button for more than 1.5 seconds, each Forward): CAUTION program will play for about 10 seconds. To stopPush the (rewind) button to rewind the playing, push the button again. ● Do not force the compact disc into thetape. Push the (fast forward) button to fast slot. This could damage the player. This system searches for the blank intervals be-forward the tape. Either the REW or FF symbolilluminates on the display window. To stop the tween selections. If there is a blank interval within Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-27 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 156. ● Trying to load a CD with the CD door REW (Rewind), FF (Fast REPEAT (RPT): closed could damage the CD and/or CD Forward): When the PROG/RPT button is pushed while the changer. When the (rewind) button or (fast compact disc is being played, the play pattern forward) is pushed while the compact disc is can be changed as follows:Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position being played, the compact disc will play whileand insert the compact disc into the slot with the ALL DISC RPT → 1 TRACK RPT → 1 DISC RDM rewinding or fast forwarding. When the button islabel side facing up. The compact disc will be → ALL DISC RPT released, the compact disc will return to normalguided automatically into the slot and start play- play speed. ALL DISC RPT: the entire disk will be repeateding. SEEK/TRACK: 1 TRACK RPT: the current track will be repeatedIf the radio or tape is already operating, it will 1 DISC RDM: all tracks will be played randomlyautomatically turn off and the compact disc will When the button is pushed for less thanplay. 1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing, the CD EJECT:If the system has been turned off while the com- track being played returns to its beginning. Push When the button is pushed with the com-pact disc was playing, pushing the ON·OFF/VOL several times to skip back through tracks. The pact disc loaded, the compact disc will becontrol knob will start the compact disc. compact disc will go back the number of times ejected. the button is pushed.3.1 in (8 cm) diameter compact discs can also be When button is pushed while the compactused without an adapter. When the button is pushed for less than disc is being played, the compact disc will eject 1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing, theCD button: When the CD button is pushed with and the system will turn off. next track will start to play from its beginning.the system off and the compact disc loaded, the Push several times to skip through tracks. The If the compact disc ejects and is not re-system will turn on and the compact disc will start compact disc will advance the number of times moved, it will be pulled back into the slot toto play. the button is pushed. (When the last track on the protect it (except 3.1 in (8 cm) diameterWhen the CD button is pushed with the compact compact disc is skipped through, the first track compact discs).disc loaded but the tape or the radio playing, the will be played.)tape or radio will automatically be turned off and CD IN indicator: When the or button is pushed forthe compact disc will start to play. more than 1.5 seconds, each track will play for CD IN indicator appears on the display when the about 10 seconds. To stop playing, push CD is loaded with the system on. the button.4-28 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 157. Compact disc (CD) changer operation To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, push the When the button is pushed for less than(Type B) LOAD button for more than 1.5 seconds. 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is playing, the next track will start to play from its beginning. The slot numbers (1 - 6) will illuminate on the CAUTION Push several times to skip through tracks. The display when CDs are loaded into the changer. compact disc will advance the number of times● Do not force a compact disc into the CD CD button: When the CD button is pushed with the button is pushed. (When the last track on the insert slot. This could damage the CD the system off and the compact disc loaded, the compact disc is skipped through, the first track and/or CD changer/player. system will turn on and the compact disc will start will be played.)● Trying to load a CD with the CD door to play. When pushing the or button for closed could damage the CD and/or CD When the CD button is pushed with the compact more than 1.5 seconds, each track will play for changer. disc loaded with the tape or the radio playing, the about 10 seconds. To stop playing, pushTurn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position tape or radio will automatically be turned off and the button again.and insert the compact disc into the slot with the the compact disc will start to play. CD select buttons:label side facing up. The compact disc will be REW (Rewind), FF (Fastguided automatically into the slot and start play- Forward): To play another CD that has been loaded, push aing. To insert the disc, first push the LOAD button. CD select button (1 - 6). When the (rewind) or (fast for-If the radio or tape is already operating, it will ward) button is pushed while a compact disc is REPEAT (RPT):automatically turn off and the compact disc will playing, the compact disc will play while rewind- When the PROG/RPT play button is pushedplay. ing or fast forwarding . When the button is re- while the compact disc is played, the play pattern leased, the compact disc will return to normal can be changed as follows:If the system has been turned off while the com- play speed.pact disc was playing, pushing the ON·OFF/VOL ALL DISC RPT → 1 DISC RPT→ 1 TRACK RPTcontrol knob will start the compact disc. SEEK/TRACK: → ALL DISC RDM → 1 DISC RDM → ALL DISC RPTLOAD button: When the button is pushed for less than 1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing, the ALL DISC RPT: All discs loaded will be repeated.To insert a CD in the CD changer, push the LOAD track being played returns to its beginning. Push 1 DISC RPT: The disc that is currently playing willbutton for less than 1.5 seconds. Select the several times to skip back through tracks. The be repeated.loading slot by pushing the CD insert select compact disc will go back the number of times 1 TRACK RPT: The track that is currently playingbutton (1 - 6), then insert the CD. the button is pushed. will be repeated Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-29 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 158. ALL DISC RDM: Tracks from all discs will be When this button is pushed while the compactplayed randomly disc is being played, the compact disc will eject1 DISC RDM: Tracks from the disc that is cur- and the system will turn off.rently playing will be played randomly CD IN indicator: The slot numbers (1 - 6) will CD EJECT: illuminate if CDs have been loaded into the changer.Current disc: ● Press the button. The compact disc will be ejected. If the disc is not removed within 15 seconds, the disc will reload (ex- cept 3.1 in (8 cm) diameter compact discs).Select a disc: LHA0049 ● Press the slot number (1 - 6) for the desired disc, then press the button. The com- CD CARE AND CLEANING pact disc will be ejected. If the disc is not ● Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the removed within 15 seconds, the disc will disc. Never touch the surface of the disc. reload (except 3.1 in (8 cm) diameter com- pact discs). ● Always place the discs in the storage case when they are not being used.All discs: ● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the ● Press and hold the button for more center to the outer edge using a clean, soft than 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will be cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular ejected one by one. If a disc is not removed motion. within 15 seconds, or the button is ● Do not use a conventional record cleaner or pressed again during the eject sequence, alcohol intended for industrial use. the entire disc eject sequence will be can- celed.4-30 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 159. ● A new disc may be rough on the inner and MODE select switch outer edges. Remove the rough edges by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the Push the mode select switch to change the mode side of a pen or pencil as illustrated. in the following sequence: AM, FM, SAT, CD and Tape. Volume control switches Push the volume control switch to increase or decrease the volume. Tuning Memory change (radio): Push the tuning switch ( or ) for less LHA0269 than 1.5 seconds to change the radio frequency. 1. Volume control switch Seek tuning (radio): 2. MODE select switch 3. POWER on/off switch Push the tuning switch ( or ) for 4. Tuning switch more than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previ- ous radio station. STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR AUDIO CONTROL FF, REW (tape and CD): The audio system can be operated using the Push the tuning switch ( or ) for less controls on the steering wheel. 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the present program or skip to the next program. POWER on/off switch Push several times to skip back or skip through programs. With the ignition key turned to the ACC or ON position, push the POWER switch to turn the The automatic program search searches for the audio system on or off. blank intervals between selections on cassette tapes. If there is a blank interval within a program Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-31 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 160. CAR PHONE OR CB RADIOor there is no interval between programs, the ● When cleaning the inside of the rear When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone insystem may not stop in the desired or expected window, be careful not to scratch or your NISSAN, be sure to observe the followinglocation. damage the rear window antenna. cautions, otherwise the new equipment may ad- Lightly wipe along the antenna with a versely affect the MFI (Multiport Fuel Injection)When playing a tape, push the tuning switch dampened soft cloth. system and other electronic parts.( or ) for more than 1.5 seconds torewind or fast forward the tape. WARNINGTo stop the FF or REW function, press the ● A cellular telephone should not be usedor button for less than 1.5 seconds again. while driving so full attention may beWhen playing a CD in the CD changer (if so given to vehicle operation. Some juris-equipped), push the tuning switch ( dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele-or ) for more than 1.5 seconds to change phones while driving.between discs when multiple CDs are loaded. ● If you must make a call while your ve- hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-ANTENNA lar phone operational mode (if soWindow antenna equipped) is highly recommended. Ex- ercise extreme caution at all times soThe antenna pattern is printed inside the rear full attention may be given to vehiclewindow. operation. ● If a conversation in a moving vehicle CAUTION requires you to take notes, pull off the● Do not place metalized film near the road to a safe location and stop your rear window glass or attach any metal vehicle before doing so. parts to it. This may cause poor recep- tion or noise. CAUTION ● Keep the antenna as far away as pos- sible from the Engine Control Module (ECM).4-32 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 161. ● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in (20 cm) away from the Multiport Fuel Injection harness. Do not route the an- tenna wire next to any harness.● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer.● Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body.● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer. Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-33 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 162. MEMO4-34 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
  • 163. 5 Starting and drivingPrecautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18Ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Traction control system (TCS) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 5-20 Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system Nissan vehicle immobilizer system (NVIS) . . . . . . . . . 5-5 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Automatic transmission (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Cruise control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 164. PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTINGAND DRIVING WARNING ● If you suspect that exhaust fumes are a. The vehicle is raised for service. entering the vehicle, drive with all win-● Do not leave children or adults who b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are dows fully open, and have the vehicle would normally require the support of entering into the passenger inspected immediately. others alone in your vehicle. Pets compartment. should not be left alone either. They ● Do not run the engine in closed spaces c. You notice a change in the sound of could accidentally injure themselves or such as a garage. the exhaust system. others through inadvertent operation of ● Do not park the vehicle with the engine the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, d. You have had an accident involving running for any extended length of time. temperatures in a closed vehicle could damage to the exhaust system, un- quickly become high enough to cause ● Keep the trunk lid closed while driving, derbody, or rear of the vehicle. severe or possibly fatal injuries to otherwise exhaust gases could be people or animals. drawn into the passenger compart- THREE-WAY CATALYST ment. If you must drive with the trunk lid● Closely supervise children when they The three-way catalyst is an emission control open, follow these precautions: are around cars to prevent them from device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust playing and becoming locked in the 1. Open all the windows. gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at trunk where they could be seriously in- 2. Set the air recirculation but- high temperatures to help reduce pollutants. jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear ton to off and the fan control dial to seatback and trunk lid securely latched high to circulate the air. WARNING when not in use, and prevent children’s access to car keys. ● If electrical wiring or other cable con- ● The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys- nections must pass to a trailer through tem are very hot. Keep people, animalsEXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide) the seal on the trunk lid or the body, or flammable materials away from the follow the manufacturer’s recommen- exhaust system components. WARNING dation to prevent carbon monoxide en- ● Do not stop or park the vehicle over● Do not breathe exhaust gases; they try into the vehicle. flammable materials such as dry grass, contain colorless and odorless carbon ● The exhaust system and body should be waste paper or rags. They may ignite monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger- inspected by a qualified mechanic and cause a fire. ous. It can cause unconsciousness or whenever: death.5-2 Starting and driving ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 165. CAUTION AVOIDING COLLISION AND DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND ROLLOVER DRIVING● Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits from leaded gasoline will seriously re- duce the three-way catalyst’s ability to WARNING WARNING help reduce exhaust pollutants. Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe Never drive under the influence of alcohol● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc- and prudent manner may result in loss of or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re- tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or control or an accident. duces coordination, delays reaction time electrical systems can cause overrich and impairs judgement. Driving after Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey drinking alcohol increases the likelihood fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv- of being involved in an accident injuring high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma- yourself and others. Additionally, if you ing if the engine misfires, or if notice- neuvers, because these driving practices could are injured in an accident, alcohol can able loss of performance or other un- cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with increase the severity of the injury. usual operating conditions are any vehicle, loss of control could result in a detected. Have the vehicle inspected NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However, collision with other vehicles or objects, or promptly by a NISSAN dealer. you must choose not to drive under the influence cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel the loss of control causes the vehicle to of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are level. Running out of fuel could cause slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al- the engine to misfire, damaging the avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under though the local laws vary on what is considered three-way catalyst. the influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre- to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol scription or over-the-counter drugs which may affects all people differently and most people● Do not race the engine while warming it underestimate the effects of alcohol. cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt up. as outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And● Do not push or tow your vehicle to start supplemental air bags” section of this manual, that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre- the engine. and also instruct your passengers to do so. scription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if your Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in colli- ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco- sions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an hol, drugs, or some other physical condition. unbelted or improperly belted person is significantly more likely to be injured or killed than a person wearing a seat belt. Starting and driving 5-3 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 166. IGNITION SWITCH 1. Move the shift selector lever into the P (Park) unlock the steering wheel, insert the key position. and turn it gently while rotating the steer- ing wheel slightly right and left. 2. Turn the ignition key slightly toward the ON position. WARNING 3. Turn the key to the LOCK position. Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK 4. Remove the key. position while driving. The steering wheel will lock. This may cause the driver to lose The shift selector lever is designed so it cannot control of the vehicle and could result in moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other serious vehicle damage or personal injury. gear positions if the ignition key is turned to OFF position or if the key is removed from the switch. The shift selector lever can be moved if the WSD0041 ignition switch is in the ACC position. This allows the vehicle to be moved if the bat-AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION tery is discharged. The shift selector lever can also be moved if the ignition switch isOn automatic transmission models, the ignition in the ON position and the foot brake pedallock is designed so the key cannot be turned to is depressed.LOCK position and removed until the shift selec-tor lever is moved to the P (Park) position. There is an OFF position between the LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF positionWhen removing the key from the ignition, make is indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder.sure the shift selector lever is in the P (Park) When the ignition is in the OFF position,position. the steering wheel is not locked.If the selector lever is not returned to P (Park) In order for the steering wheel to be locked, itposition, the key cannot be move to the LOCK must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwiseposition. from the straight up position.When the key cannot be turned to the LOCK To lock the steering wheel, turn the key toposition, proceed as follows to remove the key. the LOCK position. Remove the key. To5-4 Starting and driving ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 167. To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to START: (4) the LOCK position. Remove the key. To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key This position starts the engine. As soon as the and turn it gently while rotating the steer- engine has started, release the key. It automati- ing wheel slightly right and left. cally returns to the ON position. NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER WARNING SYSTEM (NVIS) Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK position while driving. The steering wheel The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (NVIS) will lock. This may cause the driver to lose will not allow the engine to start without the use of control of the vehicle and could result in the registered NVIS key. serious vehicle damage or personal injury. If the engine fails to start using the registered NVIS key, it may be due to interference caused by an- KEY POSITIONS other NVIS key, an automated toll road device or WSD0058 LOCK: Normal parking position (0) automated payment device on the key ring. RestartMANUAL TRANSMISSION the engine using the following procedures: OFF: (Manual transmission model) (1)The ignition switch includes a device that helps 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON positionprevent accidental removal of the key while driv- The engine can be turned off without locking the for approximately 5 seconds. steering wheel.ing. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK ACC: (Accessories) (2) position and wait approximately 5 seconds.The key can only be removed when the ignitionswitch is in the LOCK position. This position activates electrical accessories 3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again. such as the radio when the engine is not running.On manual transmission models, to turn the igni- 4. Restart the engine while holding the devicetion key to LOCK position from ACC or ON ON: Normal operating position (3) (which may have caused the interference)position, turn the key to OFF, push the key in, then This position turns on the ignition system and the separate from the registered NVIS key.turn the key to LOCK. electrical accessories. If this procedure allows the engine to start,In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it NISSAN recommends placing the registeredmust be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwise NVIS key on a separate key ring to avoid interfer-from the straight up position. ence from other devices. Starting and driving 5-5 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 168. BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE ● Make sure the area around the vehicle is 1. Apply the parking brake. ● If the engine is very hard to start in ex- clear. tremely cold weather or when restarting, 2. Automatic transmission: ● Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool- depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap- ant, brake and clutch fluid, and window Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) or N proximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold it washer fluid as frequently as possible, or at (Neutral). P (Park) is recommended. and then crank the engine. Release the least whenever you refuel. key and the accelerator pedal when the The shift selector lever cannot be engine starts. ● Check that all windows and lights are clean. moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition ● If the engine is very hard to start because ● Visually inspect tires for their appearance key is turned to the OFF position or if it is flooded, depress the accelerator and condition. Also check tires for proper the key is removed from the ignition pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. inflation. switch. Crank the engine for 5-6 seconds. After ● Lock all doors. cranking the engine, release the accel- The starter is designed not to operate if erator pedal. Crank the engine with your ● Position seat and adjust head restraints. the shift selector lever is in any of the foot off the accelerator pedal by turn- ● Adjust inside and outside mirrors. driving positions. ing the ignition key to START. Release the ● Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to Manual transmission: key when the engine starts. If the engine do likewise. starts, but fails to run, repeat the above Move the shift lever to N (Neutral). Depress procedure. ● Check the operation of warning lights when the clutch pedal to the floor while cranking the key is turned to the ON (3) position. See the engine. CAUTION “Warning/indicator lights and audible re- The starter is designed not to operate minders” in the “Instruments and controls” Do not operate the starter for more than unless the clutch pedal is fully de- 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does section of this manual. pressed. not start, turn the key off and wait 10 3. Crank the engine with your foot off the seconds before cranking again, otherwise accelerator pedal by turning the ignition the starter could be damaged. key to START. Release the key when the engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure.5-6 Starting and driving ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 169. DRIVING THE VEHICLE4. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec- AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (if so The automatic transmission in your vehicle is onds after starting. Do not race the engine electronically controlled to produce maximum while warming it up. Drive at moderate equipped) power and smooth operation. speed for a short distance first, especially in WARNING The recommended operating procedures for this cold weather. transmission are shown on the following pages. In cold weather, keep the engine running for ● Do not depress the accelerator pedal Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle a minimum of 2–3 minutes before shutting it while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu- performance and driving enjoyment. off. Starting and stopping the engine over a tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), 2 or 1. short period of time may make the vehicle Always depress the brake pedal until Starting the vehicle more difficult to start. shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and 1. After starting the engine, fully depress the have an accident. foot brake pedal before attempting to move the shift selector lever out of the P (Park) ● Cold engine idle speed is high, so use position. caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has 2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and warmed up. move the shift selector lever into a driving gear. ● Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse) while the vehicle is moving. This could 3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start cause an accident. the vehicle in motion. The automatic transmission is designed so CAUTION the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed ● When stopping the vehicle on an uphill before shifting from P (Park) to any drive grade, do not hold the vehicle by de- position while the ignition switch is in the pressing the accelerator pedal. The foot ON position. brake should be used for this purpose. The shift selector lever cannot be moved ● Do not downshift abruptly on slippery out of P (Park) and into any of the other roads. This may cause a loss of control. gear positions if the ignition key is turned to the LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if the key is removed. Starting and driving 5-7 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 170. any D (Drive) position, the shift selector lever R (Reverse): cannot be moved to P (Park). Additionally, the key cannot be turned to the LOCK position and be CAUTION removed from the ignition switch. If this occurs, Use this position only when the vehicle is perform the following steps: completely stopped. 1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is Use this position to back up. Make sure the stopped. vehicle is completely stopped before selecting 2. Turn the key to the ON position. the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal must be depressed to move the selector 3. Depress the foot brake pedal. lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive 4. Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) or N position to R (Reverse). (Neutral) to restart the vehicle (P is pre- N (Neutral): ferred). Move the shift selector lever to P WSD0076 (Park) to park the vehicle and turn the igni- Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. TheShifting tion key to the LOCK position to remove the engine can be started in this position. You mayAfter starting the engine, fully depress the brake key. shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled enginepedal and move the shift selector lever out of the while the vehicle is moving. P (Park):P (Park) position. D (Drive): Use this selector position when the vehicle is WARNING parked or when starting the engine. Make sure Use this position for all normal forward driving. the vehicle is completely stopped. The brakeApply the parking brake if the selector 3 (Third gear): pedal must be depressed to move the se-lever is in any position while the engine is lector lever from N (Neutral) or any drive Use this position for driving up and down longnot running. Failure to do so could cause position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake. slopes where engine braking would be advanta-the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake geous.away and result in serious personal injuryor property damage. first, then move the shift selector lever into the P 2 (Second gear): (Park) position.If the key is turned to the OFF or ACC position for Use this position for hill climbing or engine brak-any reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral), or ing on downhill grades.5-8 Starting and driving ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 171. Do not shift into the 2 position at speeds above M5 (Fifth):60 MPH (96 km/h). Do not exceed 60 MPH (96km/h) in the 2 position. Use this position for all normal forward driving.1 (Low gear): M4 (Fourth):Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly For driving up or down long slopes where engineor slow driving through deep snow, sand or mud, braking would be advantageous.or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill M3 (Third) and M2 (Second):grades. Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhillDo not shift into the 1 position at speeds above grades.37 MPH (60 km/h). Do not exceed 37 MPH (60km/h) in the 1 position. M1 (First): Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly LSD0071 or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or Manual shift mode mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades. When the selector lever is shifted from D to the ● Remember not to drive at high speeds for manual shift gate with the vehicle stopped or extended periods of time in lower than M4 while driving, the transmission enters the manual range. This reduces fuel economy. shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manu- ally. When shifting up: In the manual shift mode, the shift range is dis- Move the selector lever to the + (up) side. (Shifts played on the position indicator in the meter. to higher range.) When shifting the shift lever to the manual shift When shifting down: gate, the position indicator first displays M4 (Fourth) Move the selector lever to the Ϫ (down) side. (Shifts to lower range.) Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows: ● The transmission will automatically shift the M1→ M2 → M3 → M4 → M5 gears between the 1st and the selected Starting and driving 5-9 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 172. range. (For example, if you select the 3rd To push the shift lock release, complete the fol- range, the transmission will shift up or down lowing procedure: between the 1st and 3rd gears.) 1. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position ● Moving the selector lever rapidly to the same and remove the key side twice will shift the ranges in succession. 2. Apply the parking brake.When canceling the manual shift mode: 3. Remove the shift lock release cover asReturn the selector lever to the D position to shown.return the transmission to the normal drivingmode. 4. Insert a small screwdriver in the shift lock release slot and push down. ● In the manual shift mode, the transmis- sion may not shift to the selected gear. 5. Move the shift selector lever to the N (Neu- This helps maintain driving perfor- tral) position while holding down the shift mance and reduces the chance of ve- LSD0072 lock release. hicle damage or loss of control. Shift lock release 6. Turn the key to the ON position to unlock the ● In the manual shift mode, the transmis- steering wheel. Now the vehicle may be sion may shift up automatically to a If the battery is discharged, the shift selector lever may not be moved from the P (Park) position even moved to the desired location. higher range than selected if the en- gine speed is too high. When the ve- with the brake pedal depressed. If the shift selector lever cannot be moved out of hicle speed decreases, the transmis- To move the shift selector lever, release the shift P (Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the auto- sion automatically shifts down and lock. The shift selector lever can be moved to N matic transmission system as soon as possible. shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle (Neutral). However, the steering wheel will be comes to a stop. locked unless the ignition switch is turned to the WARNING ON position. This allows the vehicle to be moved If the selector lever cannot be moved from if the battery is discharged. the P (Park) position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is depressed, the stop lights may not work. Malfunction- ing stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.5-10 Starting and driving ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 173. Accelerator downshift MANUAL TRANSMISSION— in D position — WARNINGFor passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis- ● Do not downshift abruptly on slipperysion down into a lower gear, depending on the roads. This may cause a loss of control.vehicle speed. ● Do not over-rev the engine when shift-Fail-safe ing to a lower gear. This may cause a loss of control or engine damage.When the fail-safe operation occurs, please notethat the 4–speed automatic transmission will be CAUTIONlocked in third gear. For the 5–speed automatictransmission, the transmission will be locked in ● Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedalany of the gears according to the condition. while driving. This may cause clutch damage. LSD0073If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-ditions, such as excessive wheel spinning ● Fully depress the clutch pedal before Shiftingand subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe shifting to help prevent transmissionsystem may be activated. This will occur damage. To change gears, or when upshifting or down-even if all electrical circuits are functioning shifting, depress the clutch pedal fully, shift into ● Stop your vehicle completely beforeproperly. In this case, turn the ignition key shifting into R (Reverse). the appropriate gear, then release the clutchOFF and wait for 3 seconds. Then turn the slowly and smoothly.key back to the ON position. The vehicle ● When the vehicle is stopped with the engine running (for example, at a stop This vehicle is equipped with a short throw shiftershould return to its normal operating con- manual transmission. To ensure smooth geardition. If it does not return to its normal light), shift to N (Neutral) and release the clutch pedal with the foot brake changes, fully depress the clutch pedal beforeoperating condition, have a NISSAN dealer applied. operating the shift lever. If the clutch pedal is notcheck the transmission and repair it if nec- fully depressed before the transmission is shifted,essary. a gear noise may be heard. Transmission damage may occur. Starting and driving 5-11 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 174. PARKING BRAKEStart the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd, 3rd, For quick acceleration in high altitude areas (over WARNING4th and 5th up to 6th gear in sequence according 4,000 ft [1,219 m]):to vehicle speed. GEAR CHANGE MPH (km/h) ● Be sure the parking brake is fully re- leased before driving. Failure to do soTo back up, lift up on the reverse lever and then 1st to 2nd 15 (24) can cause brake failure and lead to anmove it to the R (Reverse) position after stopping 2nd to 3rd 25 (40) accident.the vehicle completely. 3rd to 4th 40 (65) ● Do not release the parking brake from 4th to 5th 45 (75)If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R outside the vehicle.(Reverse) or 1 (1st), shift into N (Neutral), then 5th to 6th 50 (80) ● Do not use the gear shift in place of therelease the clutch pedal. Depress the clutch Suggested maximum speed in each gear parking brake. When parking, be surepedal again and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (1st). Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not the parking brake is fully engaged.Suggested upshift speeds running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate. ● Do not leave children unattended in a Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed vehicle. They could release the parkingThe following are suggested vehicle speeds for (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, brake and cause an accident.shifting into a higher gear. These suggestionsrelate to fuel economy and vehicle performance. use the highest gear suggested for that speed.Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road Always observe posted speed limits, and driveconditions, the weather and individual driving according to the road conditions, which will en-habits. sure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may causeFor quick acceleration in low altitude areas (less engine damage or loss of vehicle control.than 4,000 ft [1,219 m]) and normal accelera- GEAR MPH (km/h)tion in high altitude areas (over 4,000 ft[1,219 m]): 1st 35 (55) GEAR CHANGE MPH (km/h) 2nd 60 (95) 1st to 2nd 15 (24) 3rd — 2nd to 3rd 25 (40) 4th — 3rd to 4th 40 (64) 5th — 4th to 5th 45 (72) 6th — 5th to 6th 50 (80)5-12 Starting and driving ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 175. CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped) 4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light goes out. LSD0074 LSD0075To engage: Pull the lever up ᭺. A 1. ACCEL/RES switchTo release: 2. COAST/SET switch 3. ON/OFF switch 1. Firmly apply the foot brake. 4. CANCEL switch 2. Manual transmission models: PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral) posi- CONTROL tion. ● If the cruise control system malfunctions, it Automatic transmission models: cancels automatically. The SET indicator light in the instrument panel then blinks to Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park) warn the driver. position. 3. While pulling up on the parking brake lever ● If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the slightly, push the button and lower com- cruise control main switch off and have the pletely ᭺. B system checked by a NISSAN dealer. Starting and driving 5-13 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 176. ● The SET indicator light may blink when the ● The vehicle may not maintain the set speed CAUTION cruise control main switch is turned ON when going up or down steep hills. If this while pushing the ACCEL/RES, On manual transmission models, do not happens, drive without the cruise control. COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch (located shift into N (Neutral) without depressing the clutch pedal when the cruise control is To cancel the preset speed, use one of the on the steering wheel). To properly set the following three methods. cruise control system, use the following pro- set. Should this occur, depress the clutch cedures. pedal and turn the main switch off imme- ● Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicator diately. Failure to do so may cause engine light in the instrument panel goes out. damage. WARNING ● Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator lightDo not use the cruise control when driving CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS goes out.under the following conditions: The cruise control allows driving at a speed be- ● Turn the main switch off. Both the CRUISE● When it is not possible to keep the tween 30 - 90 MPH (48 - 144 km/h) without indicator light and SET indicator light in the vehicle at a set speed. keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. instrument panel go out.● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in To turn on the cruise control, push the main The cruise control is automatically canceled and speed. switch. The CRUISE indicator light in the instru- the SET light in the instrument panel goes out if: ment panel comes on. ● you depress the brake or clutch pedal while● On winding or hilly roads. To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to pushing the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.). switch. The preset speed is deleted from the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch● In very windy areas. and release it. The SET indicator light in the memory.Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle instrument panel comes on. Take your foot off the ● the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPHcontrol and result in an accident. accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set (13 km/h) below the set speed. speed. ● you depress the clutch pedal (manual trans- ● To pass another vehicle, depress the ac- mission), or move the shift selector lever to N celerator pedal. When you release the (Neutral) (automatic transmission). pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously set speed.5-14 Starting and driving ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 177. BREAK-IN SCHEDULE INCREASING FUEL ECONOMYTo reset at a faster cruising speed, use one ● Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain CAUTIONof the following three methods. cruising speeds with a constant accelerator During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), position. ● Depress the accelerator pedal. When the follow these recommendations to obtain vehicle attains the desired speed, push and maximum engine performance and en- ● Drive at moderate speeds on the highway. release the COAST/SET switch. sure the future reliability and economy of Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy. ● Push and hold the RES/ACCEL switch. your new vehicle. Failure to follow these ● Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. When the vehicle attains the speed you de- recommendations may result in short- Maintain a safe distance behind other ve- sire, release the switch. ened engine life and reduced engine hicles. performance. ● Push and release the RES/ACCEL switch. ● Use a proper gear range which suits road Each time you do this, the set speed in- ● Avoid driving for long periods at constant conditions. On level roads, shift into high creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the gear as soon as possible. engine over 4,000 rpm.To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one ● Avoid unnecessary engine idling.of the following three methods. ● Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear. ● Keep your engine tuned up. ● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve- ● Avoid quick starts. ● Follow the recommended periodic mainte- hicle attains the desired speed, push the ● Avoid hard braking as much as possible. nance schedule. COAST/SET switch and release it. ● Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles ● Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres- ● Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re- (800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear lease the switch when the vehicle slows to could be damaged. and lowers fuel economy. the desired speed. ● Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im- ● Push and release the COAST/SET switch. proper alignment increases tire wear and Each time you do this, the set speed de- lowers fuel economy. creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). ● Air conditioner operation lowers fuelTo resume the preset speed, push and re- economy. Use the air conditioner only whenlease the RES/ACCEL switch. The vehicle re- necessary.turns to the last set cruising speed when thevehicle speed is over 30 MPH (48 km/h). Starting and driving 5-15 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 178. PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS ● When cruising at highway speeds, it is more economical to use the air conditioner and leave the windows closed to reduce drag. ● Use the recommended viscosity engine oil. See “Engine oil and oil filter recommenda- tion” in “Technical and consumer informa- tion” later in this manual. WSD0050 ● Safe parking procedures require that WARNING both the parking brake be set and the ● Do not stop or park the vehicle over transmission placed into P (Park) for flammable materials such as dry grass, automatic transmission models or in an waste paper or rags. They may ignite appropriate gear for manual transmis- and cause a fire. sion models. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident. Make sure the shift lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal. ● Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended.5-16 Starting and driving ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 179. POWER STEERING● Do not leave children unattended inside ● HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO The power assisted steering is designed to use a the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac- CURB: ᭺ C hydraulic pump, driven by the engine, to assist tivate switches or controls. Unattended steering. Turn the wheels toward the side of the road children could become involved in seri- so the vehicle will move away from the cen- If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you ous accidents. ter of the road if it moves. will still have control of the vehicle. However,1. Firmly apply the parking brake. much greater steering effort is needed, especially 4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position in sharp turns and at low speeds.2. Manual transmission models: and remove the key. Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) posi- WARNING tion. When parking on an uphill grade, place If the engine is not running or is turned off the shift lever in 1st gear. while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be Automatic transmission models: much harder to operate. Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park) position.3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.● HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: ᭺ A Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.● HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: ᭺ B Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb. Starting and driving 5-17 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 180. BRAKE SYSTEMThe brake system has two separate hydraulic This procedure is described in the vehicle service WARNINGcircuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still manual and can be performed by a NISSANhave braking at two wheels. ● While driving on a slippery surface, be dealer. careful when braking, accelerating orBRAKE PRECAUTIONS downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel- ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) erating could cause the wheels to skidVacuum assisted brakes and result in an accident. The anti-lock brake system controls the brakes so the wheels do not lock when braking abruptly orThe brake booster aids braking by using engine ● If the engine is not running or is turned when braking on slippery surfaces. The systemvacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the off while driving, the power assist for detects the rotation speed at each wheel andvehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, the brakes will not work. Braking will be varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent eachgreater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be harder. wheel from locking and sliding. By preventingrequired to stop the vehicle and stopping dis- wheel lockup, the system helps the driver main-tance will be longer. Wet brakes tain steering control and helps to minimize swerv- When the vehicle is washed or driven through ing and spinning on slippery surfaces.Using the brakes water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your Using the systemAvoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while braking distance will be longer and the vehicledriving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the may pull to one side during braking. Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.brake linings and pads faster, and reduce gasmileage. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe WARNING speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal toTo help reduce brake wear and to prevent the heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing sobrakes from overheating, reduce speed and to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high may result in increased stoppingdownshift to a lower gear before going down a speeds until the brakes function correctly. distances.slope or long grade. Overheated brakes mayreduce braking performance and could result in Parking brake bedding Normal operationloss of vehicle control. The parking brake shoes must be “bedded down” The anti-lock brake system does not operate at whenever the stopping effect of the parking speeds below 3 - 6 MPH (5 - 10 km/h). (The speeds vary according to road conditions.) brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drum/rotors are replaced, in order When driving, the anti-lock brake system con- to assure the best brake performance. trols the wheels so they will not lock when brak-5-18 Starting and driving ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 181. ing abruptly or when braking on a slippery road. If a malfunction occurs in the system, the anti- ● Tire type and condition of tires may alsoThus, difficult steering and swerving of the ve- lock function will not operate, but the standard affect braking effectiveness.hicle due to locked wheels is minimized. The vehicle brake system will continue to operatesystem detects the wheel rotation rate and elec- normally. The ABS brake warning light will then ● When replacing tires, install the speci-tronically controls the pressure applied to each come on. fied size of tires on all four wheels.brake. Slight vibration on the brake pedal accom- ● When installing a spare tire, make sure If the light comes on during the self-test or whilepanied by noise usually occurs while the ABS it is the proper size and type as speci- driving, take the vehicle to a NISSAN dealer forsystem is operating. Such vibration and noise fied on the tire placard. For tire placard repair. location information, refer to “Tire plac-encountered during abrupt braking is not a prob-lem, but indicates that the system is functioning ard” in the “Technical and consumer WARNING information” section of this manual.properly. However, the pulsation may indicatethat road conditions are hazardous and extra care ● The anti-lock brake system is a sophis- ● Refer to “Wheels and tires” in theis required while driving. ticated device, but it cannot prevent ac- “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec- cidents resulting from careless or dan- tion of this manual.Self-test feature gerous driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during brakingThe anti-lock brake system consists of electronic on slippery surfaces, but remember thatsensors and hydraulic solenoids controlled by a the stopping distance on slippery sur-computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic faces will be longer than on normalfeature that tests the system each time you start surfaces even with the anti-lock brakethe engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in system. Stopping distances may alsoforward or reverse. When the self-test occurs, be longer on rough, gravel or snow cov-you may hear a ‘‘clunk’’ noise and/or feel a pulsa- ered roads, or if you are using tiretion in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not chains. Tire type and condition may alsoan indication of any malfunction. If the computer affect braking effectiveness. Alwayssenses any malfunction, it switches the anti-lock maintain a safe distance from the ve-brake system off and turns on the ABS brake hicle in front of you. Ultimately, the re-warning light on the instrument panel. The brake sponsibility for safety of self and otherssystem then operates normally, but without anti- rests in the hands of the driver.lock assistance. Starting and driving 5-19 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 182. TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)(if so equipped)When accelerating on slippery surfaces the tire ● When driving on extremely inclined sur- WARNINGmay spin or slip. With the vehicle traction control faces such as higher banked corners,system, sensors detect these movements and ● The traction control system is designed the traction control system may not op-control the braking and engine output to help to help improve driving stability but erate properly and the indicatorimprove vehicle stability while accelerating. does not prevent accidents due to light may come on. Do not drive on abrupt steering operation at high these types of roads. ● When the traction control system is operat- speeds or by careless or dangerous ing, the slip indicator in the instrument panel driving techniques. Reduce vehicle ● If wheels or tires other than the recom- blinks. speed and be especially careful when mended ones are used, the traction driving and cornering on slippery sur- control system may not operate prop- ● If the slip indicator blinks, the vehicle is un- erly and the indicator light may faces and always drive carefully. der slippery conditions. Be sure to drive come on. carefully. See “Slip indicator light” and “Trac- ● If brake related parts such as brake tion control off indicator light” in the “Instru- pads, rotors and calipers are not stan- ● The traction control system is not a sub- ments and controls” section of this manual. dard equipment or are extremely dete- stitute for winter tires or tire chains on a riorated, the traction control system snow covered road. ● If a malfunction occurs in the system, may not operate properly and the the and indicator lights indicator light may come on. come on in the meter panel. ● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.As long as these warning lights are on, the trac- If suspension parts such as shock ab-tion control function is canceled. The vehicle will sorbers, struts, springs and bushingsbehave like a vehicle without the system. are not standard equipment or are ex- tremely deteriorated, the traction con- trol system may not operate properly and the indicator light may come on.5-20 Starting and driving ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 183. VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)SYSTEM (if so equipped)When accelerating or driving on slippery sur- ABLS system brakes the spinning wheel which WARNINGfaces, the tires may spin or slide. With the Vehicle distributes the driving power to the other driveDynamic Control (VDC) system, sensors detect wheel. If the vehicle is operated with the vehicle ● The vehicle dynamic control system isthese movements and control the braking and dynamic control system off, all VDC and TCS designed to help improve driving stabil-engine output to help improve vehicle stability. functions will be turned off. The ABLS system ity but does not prevent accidents due and ABS will still operate with the VDC system to abrupt steering operation at high ● When the vehicle dynamic control (VDC) speeds or by careless or dangerous OFF. If the ABLS system or the ABS is activated, system is operating, the slip indicator in the driving techniques. Reduce vehicle the slip indicator light will blink and you may hear instrument panel blinks. speed and be especially careful when a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake driving and cornering on slippery sur- ● When only the traction control system (TCS) pedal. This is normal. faces and always drive carefully. portion of the vehicle dynamic control sys- While the VDC system is operating, you may feel ● If brake related parts such as brake tem is operating, the slip indicator will also a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or pads, rotors and calipers are not stan- blink. vibration from under the hood. This is normal and dard equipment or are extremely dete- ● If the slip indicator blinks, the road condi- indicates that the VDC system is working prop- riorated, the vehicle dynamic control tions are slippery. Be sure to adjust your erly. system may not operate properly and speed and driving to these conditions. See the vehicle dynamic control off indica- The computer has a built in diagnostic feature “Slip indicator light”, and “Vehicle dynamic tor light may come on. that tests the system each time you start the control off indicator light” in the “Instruments engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse ● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. and controls” section. at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you If suspension parts such as shock ab- ● Indicator light may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars If malfunction occurs in the system, the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an and bushings are not NISSAN approved the and indicator lights come indication of a malfunction. for your vehicle or are extremely dete- on in the instrument panel. riorated the vehicle dynamic control As long as these warning lights are on, the system may not operate properly. This traction control function is canceled. could adversely affect vehicle handling performance, and the vehicle dynamicThe VDC system uses an Active Brake Limited control off indicator light may come on.Slip (ABLS) system to improve vehicle traction.The ABLS system works when one of the drivingwheels is spinning on a slippery surface. The Starting and driving 5-21 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 184. COLD WEATHER DRIVING● When driving on extremely inclined sur- FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK For details, see ‘‘Changing engine coolant’’ in the faces such as higher banked corners, ‘‘Maintenance and do-it-yourself’’ section of this To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de- manual. the vehicle dynamic control system may icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes not operate properly and the vehicle TIRE EQUIPMENT frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key dynamic control off indicator light may come on. Do not drive on these types of hole. 1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to roads. ANTI-FREEZE provide superior performance on dry pave- ment. However, the performance of these● If wheels or tires other than the recom- In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem- tires will be substantially reduced in snowy mended ones are used, the vehicle dy- perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the and icy conditions. If you operate your ve- namic control system may not operate anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection. hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom- properly and the vehicle dynamic con- For details, see ‘‘Engine cooling system’’ in the mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL trol off indicator light may come on. ‘‘Maintenance and do-it-yourself’’ section of this SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Please● The vehicle dynamic control system is manual. consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, not a substitute for winter tires or tire size, speed rating and availability informa- chains on a snow covered road. BATTERY tion. If the battery is not fully charged during extremely 2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may tires may be used. However, some U.S. freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi- states and Canadian provinces prohibit their mum efficiency, the battery should be checked use. Check local, state and provincial laws regularly. For details, see ‘‘Battery’’ in the ‘‘Main- before installing studded tires. tenance and do-it-yourself’’ section of this Skid and traction capabilities of studded manual. snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires. DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER 3. Tire chains may be used. If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti- freeze, drain the cooling system, including the Use of tire chains may be prohibited accord- engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. ing to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are of proper size for5-22 Starting and driving ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 185. the tires on your vehicle and are installed SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT ● Allow more stopping distance underaccording to the chain manufacturer’s sug- these conditions. Braking should begestions. Use only SAE Class “S” It is recommended that the following items be started sooner than on dry pavement.chains. Class “S” chains are used on ve- carried in the vehicle during winter:hicles with restricted tire to vehicle clear- ● Allow greater following distances on ● A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove slippery roads.ance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains ice and snow from the windows and wiper ● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).are designed to meet the minimum clear- blades. These may appear on an otherwise clearances between the tire and the closest ve-hicle suspension or body component re- ● A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice isquired to accommodate the use of a winter jack to give it firm support. seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Trytraction device (tire chains or cables). The not to brake while on the ice, and avoidminimum clearances are determined using ● A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts. any sudden steering maneuvers.the factory equipped tire size. Other types ● Extra window washer fluid to refill the reser- ● Do not use the cruise control on slip-may damage your vehicle. Use chain ten- voir tank. pery roads.sioners when recommended by the tire ● Snow can trap dangerous exhaustchain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE gases under your vehicle. Keep snowLoose end links of the tire chain must be clear of the exhaust pipe and fromsecured or removed to prevent the possibil- WARNING around your vehicle.ity of whipping action damage to the fenders ● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so very cold snow or ice can be slick andyour vehicle when using tire chains. In addi- equipped) very hard to drive on. The vehicle willtion, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, have much less traction or “grip” under An engine block heater to assist in extreme coldyour vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle these conditions. Try to avoid driving on temperature starting is available through ahandling and performance may be adversely wet ice until the road is salted or NISSAN dealer.affected. sanded.Never install tire chains on spare tires. Do WARNING ● Whatever the condition, drive with cau-not use tire chains on dry roads. Do not use your heater with an ungrounded tion. Accelerate and slow down with care. If accelerating or downshifting too electrical system or two-pronged (cheater) fast, the drive wheels will lose even adapters. You can be injured by an electrical more traction. shock if you use an ungrounded connection. Starting and driving 5-23 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 186. MEMO5-24 Starting and driving
  • 187. 6 In case of emergencyFlat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 6-11 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 188. FLAT TIRECHANGING A FLAT TIRE ● Never change tires when the vehicle isIf you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be- on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is hazardous.low. ● Never change tires if oncoming traffic isStopping the vehicle close to your vehicle. Wait for profes- 1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and sional road assistance. away from traffic. 2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. 3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake. Shift the manual transmission into R (Reverse), or the automatic transmission into P (Park). WCE0044 4. Turn off the engine. Blocking wheels 5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to Place suitable blocks ᭺ at both the front and 1 signal professional road assistance person- back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire nel that you need assistance. ᭺ to prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is 2 6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle jacked up. and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle. WARNING Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle WARNING may move and result in personal injury.● Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the manual transmission is shifted into R (Reverse), or the auto- matic transmission into P (Park).6-2 In case of emergency ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 189. LCE0074 LCE0075 LCE0076Getting the spare tire and tools Type A Type BOpen the trunk. Lift the trunk floor carpeting andspare tire cover. Remove the jack ᭺ and wheel 1nut wrench ᭺ from the tool box. Remove the 2spare tire. In case of emergency 6-3 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 190. ● Use the correct jack-up points. Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support. ● Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary. ● Never use blocks on or under the jack. ● Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip differentials. ● Do not allow passengers to stay in the CE1089 vehicle while it is on the jack.Jacking up vehicle and removing the ● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) offdamaged tire the ground. It may cause the vehicle to move. WARNING● Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack.● Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change.6-4 In case of emergency ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 191. LCE0020 WCE0056Always refer to the proper illustrations for the 2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up Installing the spare tirecorrect placement and jack-up points for your point as illustrated so the top of the jackspecific vehicle model and jack type. contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. The spare tire is designed for emergency Align the jack head between the two use. See specific instructions under theCarefully read the caution label attached to notches in the front or the rear as shown. heading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-the jack body and the following instruc- Also fit the groove of the jack head between nance and do-it-yourself” section of thistions. the notches as shown. manual. 1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by The jack should be used on firm and 1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be- turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut level ground. tween the wheel and hub. wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts 3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever 2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten until the tire is off the ground. and rod with both hands. Carefully raise the the wheel nuts finger tight. vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Re- move the wheel nuts, and then remove the 3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel tire. nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until they are tight. In case of emergency 6-5 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 192. JUMP STARTING 4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure. To start your engine with a booster battery, the touches the ground. Then, with the wheel instructions and precautions below must be fol- COLD pressure: After vehicle has been nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely parked for three hours or more or driven lowed. in the sequence illustrated (᭺, ᭺, ᭺, ᭺, A B C D less than 1 mile (1.6 km). ᭺). Lower the vehicle completely. E WARNING COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire placard affixed to the center console. ● If done incorrectly, jump starting can WARNING lead to a battery explosion, resulting in● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly 5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip- severe injury or death. It could also tightened wheel nuts can cause the ment in the vehicle. damage your vehicle. wheel to become loose or come off. 6. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk floor ● Explosive hydrogen gas is always This could cause an accident. carpeting over the damaged tire. present in the vicinity of the battery.● Do not use oil or grease on the wheel Keep all sparks and flames away from 7. Close the trunk. studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts the battery. to become loose. ● Do not allow battery fluid to come into WARNING● Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve- contact with eyes, skin, clothing or ● Always make sure that the spare tire painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor- hicle has been driven for 600 miles and jacking equipment are properly se- rosive sulfuric acid solution which can (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, cured after use. Such items can become cause severe burns. If the fluid should etc.). dangerous projectiles in an accident or come into contact with anything, imme-As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts sudden stop. diately flush the contacted area withto the specified torque with a torque ● The spare tire is designed for emer- water.wrench. gency use. See specific instructions un- ● Keep battery out of the reach of der the heading “Wheels and tires” in children.Wheel nut tightening torque: the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” 80 ft-lb (108 N·m) section of this manual. ● The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated batteryThe wheel nuts must be kept tightened to can damage your vehicle.specification at all times. It is recom-mended that wheel nuts be tightened tospecifications at each lubrication interval.6-6 In case of emergency ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 193. ● Whenever working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump starting.● Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery. It could explode and cause se- rious injury.● Your vehicle has an automatic engine cooling fan. It could come on at any time. Keep hands and other objects away from it. WCE0054 2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever WARNING to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P Always follow the instructions below. (Park) (automatic transmission). Switch off Failure to do so could result in damage to all unnecessary electrical systems (lights, the charging system and cause personal heater, air conditioner, etc.). injury. 3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so 1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, equipped). Cover the battery with an old position the two vehicles to bring their bat- cloth to reduce explosion hazard. teries near each other. 4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence il- Do not allow the two vehicles to touch. lustrated (᭺, ᭺, ᭺, ᭺). A B C D In case of emergency 6-7 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/21/03—betty ੭
  • 194. PUSH STARTING 8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be CAUTION WARNING sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover● Always connect positive (ϩ) to positive the vent holes as it may be contaminated ● Automatic transmission models cannot (ϩ) and negative (Ϫ) to body ground (for with corrosive acid. be push-started or tow-started. This example, strut mounting bolt, engine may cause transmission or other ve- lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery. hicle damage.● Make sure the jumper cables do not ● Three-way catalyst equipped models touch moving parts in the engine com- should not be started by pushing. The partment and that the cable clamps do three-way catalyst may be damaged. not contact any other metal. ● Never try to start the vehicle by towing 5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and it. When the engine starts, the forward let it run for a few minutes. surge could cause the vehicle to collide with the tow vehicle. 6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve- hicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the en- gine of the vehicle being jump started. CAUTIONDo not keep the starter motor engaged formore than 10 seconds. If the engine doesnot start right away, turn the key off andwait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again. 7. After starting the engine, carefully discon- nect the negative cable and then the positive cable.6-8 In case of emergency ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 195. IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATSIf your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an 3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for 6. After the engine cools down, check the cool-extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if steam or coolant escaping from the radiator ant level in the reservoir tank with the engineyou feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal before opening the hood. (If steam or cool- running. Add coolant to the reservoir tank ifnoise, etc. take the following steps. ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not necessary. Have your vehicle repaired at a open the hood further until no steam or NISSAN dealer. WARNING coolant can be seen.● Do not continue to drive if your vehicle 4. Open the engine hood. overheats. Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire. WARNING● To avoid the danger of being scalded, If steam or water is coming from the en- never remove the radiator cap while the gine, stand clear to prevent getting engine is still hot. When the radiator burned. cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing serious 5. Visually check drive belts for damage or injury. looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is● Do not open the hood if steam is com- running. The radiator hoses and radiator ing out. should not leak water. If coolant is leaking, the water pump belt is missing or loose, or 1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the cooling fan does not run, stop the en- the parking brake and move the shift lever to gine. N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P (Park) (automatic transmission). WARNING Do not stop the engine. Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into contact 2. Turn off the air conditioner (if so equipped). with, or get caught in, engine belts or the Open all the windows, move the heater or air engine cooling fan. The engine cooling conditioner temperature control to maximum fan can start at any time when the coolant hot and fan control to high speed. temperature is high. In case of emergency 6-9 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 196. TOWING YOUR VEHICLEWhen towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in For information about towing your vehicle behindCanada) and local regulations for towing must be a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”followed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam- in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail- tion of this manual.able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-tors are generally familiar with the applicable lawsand procedures for towing. To assure propertowing and to prevent accidental damage to yourvehicle, NISSAN recommends having a serviceoperator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to havethe service operator carefully read the followingprecautions: WARNING● Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed.● Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck. CAUTION● When towing, make sure that the trans- mission, axles, steering system and ACE0511 powertrain are in working condition. If TOWING RECOMMENDED BY any unit is damaged, dollies must be used. NISSAN● Always attach safety chains before NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed towing. with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.6-10 In case of emergency ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 197. ● When towing automatic transmission models with the front wheels on towing dollies, or when towing manual trans- mission models with the front wheels on the ground: ● Turn the ignition key to the OFF po- sition, and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never secure the steering wheel by turning the ig- nition key to the LOCK position. This may damage the steering lock mechanism. ACE1001 ● Move the gearshift lever to the N LCE0077 (Neutral) position. VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck CAUTION● Never tow automatic transmission ● When towing automatic or manual vehicle) transmission models with the rear models with the front wheels on the wheels on the ground (if you do not use Front ground or four wheels on the ground towing dollies): Always release the (forward or backward), as this may parking brake. WARNING cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to ● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. tow the vehicle with the rear wheels ● Do not spin your tires at high speed. raised always use towing dollies under This could cause them to explode and the front wheels. result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged. In case of emergency 6-11 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 198. CAUTION Rear● Use the towing hook only, not other WARNING parts of the vehicle. Otherwise, the ve- hicle body will be damaged. ● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.● Use the towing hook only to free a ve- ● Do not spin your tires at high speed. hicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc. This could cause them to explode and Never tow the vehicle for a long dis- result in serious injury. Parts of your tance using only the towing hook. vehicle could also overheat and be damaged.● The towing hook is under tremendous force when used to free a stuck vehicle. Always pull the cable straight out from CAUTION the front or rear of the vehicle. Never ● Tow chains or cables must be attached pull the hook at an angle. only to the main structural members of● Pulling devices should be routed so the vehicle. they do not touch any part of the sus- ● Pulling devices should be routed so pension, steering, brake or cooling they do not touch any part of the sus- systems. pension, steering, brake or cooling● Pull devices such as ropes or canvas systems. straps are not recommended for use in ● Always pull the cable straight out from vehicle towing or recovery. the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull the vehicle at an angle. ● Pull devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or recovery.6-12 In case of emergency ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 199. 7 Appearance and careCleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Most common factors contributing to vehicle Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Environmental factors influence the rate of Aluminum alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 To protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 200. CLEANING EXTERIORIn order to maintain the appearance of your ve- CAUTION WAXINGhicle, it is important to take proper care of it. ● Do not wash the vehicle with strong Regular waxing protects the paint surface andTo protect the paint surfaces, please wash your household soap, strong chemical deter- helps retain new vehicle appearance. After wax-vehicle as soon as you can: gents, gasoline or solvents. ing, polishing is recommended to remove ● after a rainfall to prevent possible damage built-up residue and to avoid a “weathered” ap- ● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun- from acid rain. light or while the vehicle body is hot, as pearance. the surface may become water-spotted. A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the ● after driving on coastal roads. ● Avoid using tight-napped or rough proper product. ● when contaminants such as soot, bird drop- cloths, such as washing mitts. Care pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get ● Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash- must be taken when removing ing. Follow the instructions supplied with the on the paint surface. caked-on dirt or other foreign sub- wax. ● when dust or mud builds up on the surface. stances so the paint surface is not scratched or damaged. ● Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle cutting compounds or cleaners that mayinside a garage or in a covered area. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean damage the vehicle finish. water.When it is necessary to park outside, park in a ● If the surface does not polish easily, use ashady area or protect the vehicle with a body Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to “road tar” remover and wax again.cover. the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas Machine compounding or aggressive polishingBe careful not to scratch the paint surface must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull thewhen putting on or removing the body drain holes in the lower edge of the door are finish or leave swirl marks.cover. open. Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away REMOVING SPOTSWASHING road salt. Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to and tree sap as quickly as possible from thewater. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild avoid water spots. surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage orsoap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose staining. Special cleaning products are availabledishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory(never hot) water. store.7-2 Appearance and care ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 201. UNDERBODY Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass toIn areas where road salt is used in winter, it is become coated with a film after the vehicle isnecessary to clean the underbody regularly in parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a softorder to prevent dirt and salt from building up and cloth will easily remove this film.causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe- CAUTIONriod and again in the spring, the underseal mustbe checked and, if necessary, retreated. When cleaning the inside of the windows, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the electri- cal conductors, radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements. LAI0008 ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS GLASS Wash the wheels regularly, especially during win- When cleaning the rear window, it may be easier ter months in areas where road salt is used. If not removed, road salt could discolor the wheels. to clean if the high-mounted stop light is removed first. CHROME PARTS Be careful when removing the high-mounted Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non- stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish. high-mounted stop light wires. To remove the high-mounted stop light: ᭺ 1 Push toward rear of vehicle. ᭺ 2 Lift to remove. The high-mounted stop light must be properly reinstalled before driving your vehicle. Appearance and care 7-3 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 202. CLEANING INTERIOROccasionally remove loose dust from the interior FLOOR MATStrim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuumcleaner or soft brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex-surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make itmild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry, easier to clean the interior. No matter whatsoft cloth. Before using any fabric protector, read mats are used, be sure they are fitted forthe manufacturer’s recommendations. Some fab- your vehicle and are properly positioned inric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or the footwell to prevent interference withbleach the seat material. pedal operation. Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they be-Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean come excessively worn.the meter and gauge lens. CAUTION● Never use benzine, thinner or any simi- WAI0006 lar material. Floor mat positioning aid (driver’s side● Small dirt particles can be abrasive and only) damaging to leather surfaces and should be removed promptly. Do not This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket to use saddle soap, polishes, oils, clean- act as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor ing fluids, solvents, detergents or mats have been specially designed for your ve- ammonia-based cleaners as they may hicle model. The driver’s side floor mat has a damage the leather’s natural finish. grommet hole incorporated in it. Position the mat by placing the floor mat bracket hook through the● Never use fabric protectors unless rec- floor mat grommet hole while centering the mat in ommended by the manufacturer. the footwell.● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on Periodically check to make certain the mats are meter or gauge lens covers. It may dam- properly positioned. age the lens cover.7-4 Appearance and care ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/07/03—tbrooks ੭
  • 203. CORROSION PROTECTIONSEAT BELTS MOST COMMON FACTORS ● where road salt is used.The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE Temperaturewith a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. CORROSION High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.before using them. See “Seat belt maintenance” 1. The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirtin the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemen- and debris in body panel sections, cavities, Air pollutiontal air bags” section of this manual. and other areas. Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air 2. Damage to paint and other protective coat- in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler- WARNING ings caused by gravel and stone chips or ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the minor traffic accidents. erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye orchemical solvents to clean the seat belts, ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLEsince these materials may severely INFLUENCE THE RATE OF FROM CORROSIONweaken the seat belt webbing. CORROSION ● Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the Moisture vehicle clean. Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve- ● Always check for minor damage to the paint hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. and repair it as soon as possible. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle, and should be removed for drying to ● Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors avoid floor panel corrosion. open to avoid water accumulation. Relative humidity ● Check the underbody for accumulation of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water Corrosion will be accelerated: as soon as possible. ● in areas of high relative humidity. ● in areas where the temperatures stay above freezing. ● where atmospheric pollution exists. Appearance and care 7-5 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 204. CAUTION● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de- bris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.● Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic compo- nents inside the vehicle as this may damage them.Chemicals used for road surface de-icing areextremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosionand deterioration of underbody componentssuch as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,brake cables, floor pan and fenders.In winter, the underbody must be cleanedperiodically.For additional protection against rust and corro-sion, which may be required in some areas, con-sult a NISSAN dealer.7-6 Appearance and care ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 205. 8 Maintenance and do-it-yourselfMaintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Parking brake and brake pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Checking parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Checking brake pedal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Brake booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23 Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-234-speed automatic transmission fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23 Temperature conditions for checking. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-255-speed automatic transmission fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Keyfob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27Brake and clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28 Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33 Window washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39 Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39Drive belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 206. MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCEYour new NISSAN has been designed to have Performing general maintenance checks requires During the normal day-to-day operation of theminimum maintenance requirements with longer minimal mechanical skill and only a few general vehicle, general maintenance should be per-service intervals to save you both time and automotive tools. formed regularly as prescribed in this section. Ifmoney. However, some day-to-day and regular These checks or inspections can be done by you, you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations ormaintenance is essential to maintain your NIS- a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSAN smells, be sure to check for the cause or have aSAN’s good mechanical condition, as well as its dealer. NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, youemission and engine performance. should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that Where to go for service repairs are required.It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure thatthe scheduled maintenance, as well as general If maintenance service is required or your vehicle When performing any checks or maintenancemaintenance, is performed. appears to malfunction, have the systems work, closely observe the “Maintenance precau- checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer. tions” later in this section.As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialistscan ensure that your vehicle receives proper who are kept up-to-date with the latest service EXPLANATION OF GENERALmaintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte- information through technical bulletins, service MAINTENANCE ITEMSnance chain. tips, and in-dealership training programs. They are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve- Additional information on the followingScheduled maintenance items with “*” is found later in this section. hicles before they work on your vehicle, ratherFor your convenience, both required and optional than after they have worked on it.scheduled maintenance items are described and Outside the vehiclelisted in your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s The maintenance items listed here should beGuide.” You must refer to that guide to ensure service department performs the best job to meet performed from time to time, unless otherwise the maintenance requirements on your vehicle —that necessary maintenance is performed on your specified. in a reliable and economic way.NISSAN at regular intervals. Doors and engine hood Check that the doorsGeneral maintenance and engine hood operate properly. Also ensureGeneral maintenance includes those items which that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,should be checked during normal day-to-day op- latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op- Make sure that the secondary latch keeps theeration. It is your responsibility to perform these hood from opening when the primary latch ismaintenance procedures regularly as prescribed. released.8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 207. When driving in areas using road salt or other Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular the brake booster function. Be certain to keep thecorrosive materials, check lubrication frequently. basis. Check the windshield at least every six floor mat away from the pedal. months for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis. Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the aged windshield repaired by a qualified repairMake sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail vehicle to one side when applied. facility.lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all Clutch pedal* Make sure the pedal operatesoperating properly and installed securely. Also Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks or smoothly and check that it has the proper freecheck headlight aim. wear if they do not wipe properly. travel.Road wheel nuts* When checking the tires, Inside the vehiclemake sure no wheel nuts are missing, and check Parking brake* Check that the lever has thefor any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary. The maintenance items listed here should be proper travel and confirm that your vehicle is held checked on a regular basis, such as when per- securely on a fairly steep hill with only the parkingTire rotation* Tires should be rotated every brake applied. forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve-7,500 miles (12,000 km). hicle, etc. Seats Check seat position controls such as seatTires* Check the pressure with a gauge often adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure theyand always prior to long distance trips. If neces- Additional information on the following items with an “*” is found later in this sec- operate smoothly and all latches lock securely insary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the tion. every position. Check that the head restraintsspare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully move up and down smoothly and the locks (if sofor damage, cuts or excessive wear. Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth equipped) hold securely in all latched positions.Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle operation and make sure the pedal does not bind or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat beltshould pull to either side while driving on a from the pedal. system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjustersstraight and level road, or if you detect uneven or and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel Automatic transmission P (Park) position and are installed securely. Check the belt web-alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at mechanism On a fairly steep hill check that your bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may beneeded. vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer- the P position without applying any brakes. ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hard ● For additional information regarding tires, Brake pedal and booster* Check the pedal for steering or strange noises. refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in smooth operation and make sure it has the proper Warning lights and chimes Make sure all the Warranty Information Booklet . distance under it when depressed fully. Check warning lights and chimes are operating properly. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 208. Windshield wiper and washer* Check that Engine oil level* Check the level after parking Underbody The underbody is frequently ex-the wipers and washer operate properly and that the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off. posed to corrosive substances such as thosethe wipers do not streak. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very back into the oil pan. important to remove these substances from theWindshield defroster Check that the air underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floorcomes out of the defroster outlets properly and in Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At thesufficient quantity when operating the heater or supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the end of winter, the underbody should be thor-air conditioner. exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of oughly flushed with plain water, in those areas exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust where mud and dirt may have accumulated. SeeUnder the hood and vehicle system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See the the “Appearance and care” section of thisThe maintenance items listed here should be carbon monoxide warning in the “Starting and manual.checked periodically (for example, each time you driving” section of this manual. Windshield washer fluid* Check that there ischeck the engine oil or refuel). Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, adequate fluid in the reservoir.Automatic transmission fluid level* Check water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle hasthe level after putting the selector lever in P with been parked for a while. Water dripping from thethe engine idling at operating temperature. air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. It check for the cause and have it corrected imme-should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve- diately.hicles operated in high temperatures or undersevere conditions require frequent checks of the Power steering fluid level* and lines Checkbattery fluid level. the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,Brake and clutch fluid levels* Make sure that cracks, etc.the brake and clutch fluid level is between theMIN and MAX lines on the reservoir. Radiator and hoses Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure thewhen the engine is cold. hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or looseEngine drive belts* Make sure the drive belts connections.are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 209. MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONSWhen performing any inspection or maintenance ignition key is in the OFF position and the the fuel filter or fuel lines should bework on your vehicle, always take care to prevent engine is not running. To avoid injury, serviced by a NISSAN dealer becauseserious accidental injury to yourself or damage to always disconnect the negative battery the fuel lines are under high pressurethe vehicle. The following are general precau- cable before working near the fan. even when the engine is off.tions which should be closely observed. ● If you must work with the engine run- ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair CAUTION WARNING and tools away from moving fans, belts ● Do not work under the hood while the● Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap- and any other moving parts. engine is hot. Turn the engine off and ply the parking brake securely and wait until it cools down. ● It is advisable to secure or remove any block the wheels to prevent the vehicle loose clothing and remove any jewelry, ● Avoid contact with used engine oil and from moving. For manual transmission such as rings, watches, etc. before coolant. Improperly disposed engine models, move the shift lever to N (Neu- working on your vehicle. oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle tral). For automatic transmission mod- els, move the selector lever to P (Park). ● Always wear eye protection whenever fluids can damage the environment. Al- you work on your vehicle. ways conform to local regulations for● Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or disposal of vehicle fluid. LOCK position when performing any ● If you must run the engine in an en- parts replacement or repairs. closed space such as a garage, be sure This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section there is proper ventilation for exhaust gives instructions regarding only those items● Never leave the engine or automatic which are relatively easy for an owner to perform. gases to escape. transmission related component har- nesses disconnected while the ignition ● Never get under the vehicle while it is A genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail- switch is in the ON position. supported only by a jack. If it is neces- able. See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual or- sary to work under the vehicle, support der information” in the “Technical and consumer● Never connect or disconnect the battery it with safety stands. information” section of this manual. or any transistorized component while the ignition switch is in the ON position. ● Keep smoking materials, flame and You should be aware that incomplete or improper sparks away from the fuel tank and servicing may result in operating difficulties or● Your vehicle is equipped with an auto- battery. excessive emissions, and could affect warranty matic engine cooling fan. It may come on coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, at any time without warning, even if the ● On gasoline engine models with the have it done by a NISSAN dealer. multiport fuel injection (MFI) system, Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 210. ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS 1. Power steering fluid reservoir 2. Engine oil filler cap 3. Brake fluid reservoir 4. Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T model) 5. Air cleaner 6. Battery 7. Fuse/Fusible link box 8. Transmission dipstick (A/T models) 9. Engine oil dipstick 10. Radiator cap 11. Fuse block 12. Windshield washer fluid reservoir 13. Coolant reservoir NOTE: Engine cover removed for clarity. LDI03308-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 211. ENGINE COOLING SYSTEMThe engine cooling system is filled at the factory CAUTIONwith a high-quality, year-round, anti-freeze cool-ant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains When adding or replacing coolant, be surerust and corrosion inhibitors; therefore, additional to use only a Genuine NISSAN Long Lifeengine cooling system additives are not neces- Anti-freeze Coolant (green) or equivalentsary. with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti- freeze and 50% demineralized or distilled WARNING water. The use of other types of coolant solutions or coolant colors, such as or-● Never remove the radiator cap when the ange, may damage the engine cooling engine is hot. Serious burns could be system. caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator.● The radiator is equipped with a pres- sure type radiator cap. To prevent en- WDI0332 gine damage, use only a genuine CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT NISSAN radiator cap. LEVEL Check the coolant level in the reservoir when Outside temperature Genuine Demineral- the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below down to NISSAN ized or dis- the MIN level, add coolant to the MAX level. If the Long Life tilled water reservoir is empty, check the coolant level in the Anti-freeze radiator when the engine is cold. If there is °C °F Coolant or insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator equivalent with coolant up to the filler opening and also add -35 -30 50% 50% it to the reservoir up to the MAX level. If the cooling system frequently requires coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN dealer. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 212. ENGINE OILCHANGING ENGINE COOLANTA NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.The service procedure can be found in theNISSAN Service Manual.Improper servicing can result in reducedheater performance and engine overheat-ing. WARNING● To avoid the danger of being scalded, never change the coolant when the en- gine is hot.● Never remove the radiator cap when the LDI0329 WDI0175 engine is hot. Serious burns could be CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL 5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil caused by high pressure fluid escaping level. It should be between the H (High) and from the radiator. 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply L (Low) marks ᭺. This is the normal oper- B the parking brake.● Avoid direct skin contact with used ating oil level range. If the oil level is below coolant. If skin contact is made, wash 2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches the L (Low) mark ᭺, remove the oil filler cap A thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner operating temperature. and pour recommended oil through the as soon as possible. 3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10 opening. Do not overfill ᭺. C● Keep coolant out of the reach of chil- minutes for the oil to drain back into 6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick. dren and pets. the oil pan. It is normal to add some oil between oilEngine coolant must be disposed of properly. 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re- maintenance intervals or during theCheck your local regulations. insert it all the way. break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions.8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 213. If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and CAUTION replace it at this time. See “Changing engineOil level should be checked regularly. Op- oil filter” later in this section.erating the engine with an insufficientamount of oil can damage the engine, and WARNINGsuch damage is not covered by warranty. ● Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. ● Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. ● Keep used engine oil out of reach of children. WDI0216 CHANGING ENGINE OIL CAUTION 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine the parking brake. oil may be hot. 2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches ● Waste oil must be disposed of prop- operating temperature, then turn it off. erly. 3. Remove the oil filler cap by turning it coun- ● Check your local regulations. terclockwise. 6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new 4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug. washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with 5. Remove the drain plug with a wrench by a wrench. Do not use excessive force. turning it counterclockwise and completely Drain plug tightening torque: drain the oil. 22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m) Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 214. 7. Refill engine with recommended oil through 5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler with a clean rag. cap securely. Be sure to remove any old gasket material See “Capacities and recommended remaining on the mounting surface of the fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con- engine. sumer information” section of this manual for 6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean drain and refill capacity. engine oil. The drain and refill capacity depends on the 7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance oil temperature and drain time. Use these is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn. specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper 8. Start the engine and check for leakage amount of oil is in the engine. around the oil filter. Correct as required. 8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around 9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 WDI0218 the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re- minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if quired. CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER necessary. 9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick. the parking brake. Add engine oil if necessary. 2. Turn the engine off. 3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter. 4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Then remove the oil filter by turning it by hand. CAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot.8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 215. 4-SPEED AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION FLUID ● The fluid can be checked at fluid tempera- WARNING tures of 86 - 122°F (30 - 50°C) using the● When the engine is running, keep COLD range on the dipstick after the engine hands, jewelry and clothing away from is warmed up and before driving. However, any moving parts such as the cooling the fluid should be re-checked using the fan and drive belts. HOT range.● Automatic transmission fluid is poison- 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set ous and should be stored carefully in the parking brake. marked containers out of the reach of children. 2. Start the engine and then move the shift selector lever through each gear range, end- ing in P (Park). 3. Check the fluid level with the engine idling. LDI0321 TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS FOR CHECKING ● The fluid level should be checked using the HOT range on the dipstick after the following conditions have been met: – The engine should be warmed up to op- erating temperature. – The vehicle should be driven at least 5 minutes. – The automatic transmission fluid should be warmed to 122 - 176°F (50 - 80°C). Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 216. 5-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID When checking or replacement is required, we CAUTION recommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing. DO NOT OVERFILL. Use ONLY Genuine Nissan Matic D ATF (Continental U.S. and WARNING Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid. Dexron™ III/Mercon™ ● Use only Genuine Nissan Matic K ATF. or equivalent may also be used. Outside Do not mix with other fluids. the continental United States and Alaska ● Using automatic transmission fluid contact a NISSAN dealership for more in- other than Genuine Nissan Matic K ATF formation regarding suitable fluids, in- will cause deterioration in driveability cluding recommended brand(s) of and automatic transmission durability, Dexron™ III/Mercon™ automatic trans- and may damage the automatic trans- mission fluid. mission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty. WDI0334 NOTE: The specified automatic transmission fluid is also 4–speed If the vehicle has been driven for a long described on caution labels located in the engine 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean with time at high speeds, or in city traffic in hot compartment. lint-free paper. weather, or if it is being used to pull a trailer, the fluid level cannot be read accu- 5. Reinsert the dipstick into the dipstick tube rately. You should wait until the fluid has as far as it will go. cooled down (about 30 minutes) before 6. Remove the dipstick and note the reading. If checking fluid level. the automatic transmission fluid level is within the normal operating range ᭺, no B additional fluid is required. If the fluid level is low ᭺ add fluid through the dipstick tube. A8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 217. POWER STEERING FLUID BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID For further brake and clutch fluid specification information, refer to “Capacities and recom- mended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. WARNING Use only new fluid from a sealed con- tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake and clutch sys- tems. The use of improper fluids can dam- age the brake system and affect the vehi- cle’s stopping ability. WDI0256 CAUTION LDI0079The fluid level should be checked using the HOT Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur- BRAKE FLUIDMAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid isat fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° - spilled, immediately wash the surface Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If the80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on the with water. fluid level is below the MIN line or the brakepower steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera- warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSANtures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C). Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be addedIf the fluid is below the MIN line, add Genuine frequently, the system should be checked by aNISSAN PSF fluid. Remove the cap and fill NISSAN dealer.through the opening. CAUTION● DO NOT OVERFILL.● Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 218. WINDOW WASHER FLUID WARNING Use only new fluid from a sealed con- tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake and clutch sys- tems. The use of improper fluids can dam- age the brake system and affect the vehi- cle’s stopping ability. CAUTION Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur- faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, immediately wash the surface with water. LDI0080 LDI0335CLUTCH FLUID WINDOW WASHER FLUIDCheck the clutch fluid level in the reservoir RESERVOIR(manual transmissions only). If the fluid level is Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodically.below the MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN Super Add window washer fluid when the light comesHeavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid on (if so equipped).up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added fre-quently, the system should be checked by a To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift theNISSAN dealer. cap off the reservoir tank and pour the window washer fluid into the tank opening.For further brake and clutch fluid specificationinformation, refer to “Capacities and recom- Add a washer solvent to the washer for bettermended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshieldconsumer information” section of this manual. washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in- structions for the mixture ratio.8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 219. BATTERYRefill the reservoir more frequently when driving ● Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Any ● When working on or near a battery, al-conditions require an increased amount of win- corrosion should be washed off with a solu- ways wear suitable eye protection anddow washer fluid. tion of baking soda and water. remove all jewelry.Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind- ● Make certain the terminal connections are ● Battery posts, terminals and related ac-shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti- clean and securely tightened. cessories contain lead and lead com-freeze or equivalent. pounds. Wash hands after handling. ● If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or CAUTION longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery ● Keep battery out of the reach of terminal cable to prevent discharge. children.● Do not substitute engine anti-freeze coolant for window washer solution. WARNING This may result in damage to the paint. ● Do not expose the battery to flames or● Do not fill the window washer reservoir electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas gener- tank with washer fluid concentrates at ated by the battery is explosive. Do not full strength. Some methyl alcohol allow battery fluid to contact your skin, based washer fluid concentrates may eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. After permanently stain the grille if spilled touching a battery or battery cap, do not while filling the window washer reser- touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly voir tank. wash your hands. If the acid contacts● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately water to the manufacturer’s recom- flush with water for at least 15 minutes mended levels before pouring the fluid and seek medical attention. into the window washer reservoir tank. ● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in Do not use the window washer reservoir the battery is low. Low battery fluid can tank to mix the washer fluid concen- cause a higher load on the battery trate and water. which can generate heat, reduce bat- tery life, and in some cases lead to an explosion. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 220. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level. JUMP STARTING If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. If the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced. Contact a NISSAN dealer. WDI0224 1. Remove the battery caps with a screwdriver as shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery case. LDI0302 2. Check the fluid level in each cell If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water to bring the level up to the bottom of the filler opening. Do not overfill.8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 221. DRIVE BELTS SPARK PLUGS 2. Have the belts checked regularly for condi- tion and tension in accordance with the maintenance schedule found in the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”. WDI0226 WDI00051. Power steering fluid pump REPLACING SPARK PLUGS2. Crankshaft3. Generator Platinum-tipped spark plugs4. Air conditioner It is not necessary to replace platinum-tipped spark plugs as frequently as conventional type WARNING spark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or low the maintenance schedule, but do not reuseLOCK position. The engine could rotate the spark plugs by cleaning or regapping.unexpectedly. ● Always replace spark plugs with rec- 1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of un- ommended or equivalent ones. usual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is in poor condition or is loose, have it replaced or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/22/03—betty ੭
  • 222. AIR CLEANER WARNING WARNINGBe sure the engine and ignition switch are ● Operating the engine with the airoff and that the parking brake is engaged cleaner removed can cause you or oth-securely. ers to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops the flame if CAUTION the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the engine backfires, you could beBe sure to use the correct socket to re- burned. Do not drive with the air cleanermove the spark plugs. An incorrect socket removed, and be careful when workingcan damage the spark plugs. on the engine with the air cleanerIf replacement is required, please see your removed.NISSAN dealer for assistance. ● Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air LDI0336 cleaner removed. Doing so could result The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and in serious injury. reused. Replace it according to the maintenance intervals shown in the “NISSAN Service and IN-CABIN MICROFILTER Maintenance Guide.” When replacing the filter, The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air- wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter housing borne dust and pollen particles and reduces and the cover with a damp cloth. some objectionable outside odors. The filter is located behind the glove box. Refer to the To remove the air cleaner filter: “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” for ᭺ 1 Loosen the screw. change intervals. ᭺ 2 Disconnect the electrical connector. To replace the filter, perform the following proce- dure: ᭺ 3 Push down on the clips and remove the air cleaner cover. Remove the air cleaner filter.8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 223. LDI0323 LDI0324 LDI03251. Remove the 2 lower glove box hinge pins. 2. Remove the filter cover from the intake unit NOTE: Remove the glove box from the opening and by disengaging the 2 hook tabs at the bot- The filter is marked “UP” with an arrow. The let it hang by the cord. tom of the cover. end of the filter with the arrow should face the rear of the vehicle. 3. Slide the filter into the housing. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19 ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭
  • 224. NOTE: Make sure the filter sits on top of the 2 supporting tabs on the housing. 4. Replace the cover by inserting the upper tabs inside the housing slot and pushing the hook tabs until they snap on to the housing lip. 5. Install the glove box door. 6. Fill out the date information on the small replacement label and attach it to the glove box lid. LDI01578-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ੬ REVIEW COPY:—2004 Maxima (max) Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna) 10/20/03—arosenma ੭